UC-NRLF 


3    MANUAi;- 


SMALL  ARMS 
INSTRUCTORS  MANUAL 


iii^^iiiiiiiliii 


w^^^^^^BMimimmm 


■r>-  at<  a  '^i^c-'tti^-'iii^sr-^SiiutSi 


!^tj'^;^«S^^<^^^^;  'm:£ 


KNOWN    DISTANCE    PRACTICE. 

A   Typical    Firing   Line   on    the    New   Jersey    State    Rifle   Range   during   a 
National   Competition  at   Sea  Girt,   N.  J. 


SMALL  ARMS 
INSTRUCTORS  MANUAL 

AN  INTENSIVE  COURSE 

INCLUDING 

OFFICIAL  "C   SPECIAL  COURSE";   U.  S.  RIFLE,  MODEL  I9I7;   U.  S.  RIFLE, 

MODEL    1903    {SPRINGFIELD}]    U.  S.  RIFLE,  MODEL   l%()^  {kraag)\ 

AUTOMATIC  PISTOL,   MODEL  I9II;   REVOLVERS,  CAL's.  .45 

AND  .38;  OFFICIAL  FIRING  COURSES;  DESIGNATION 

OF     TARGETS  t      FIRE    DIRECTION    AND 

control;  USE  of  cover 

Compiled  by  the 
SMALL  ARMS  INSTRUCTION  CORPS 

REGINALD  H.  SAYRE,  Capt.  Res.  N.G.N.Y. 
STOWE  PHELPS,  Ex-Capt.  N.G.N.Y. 
GERARD  P.  HERRICK,  Ex-Ord.  Serg't  N.G.N.Y. 

Executive  Committee 

WITH  AN  INTRODUCTION  BY 

CAPTAIN  C.  C.  GRIFFITH,  C.A.C.,  U.S.A. 


1918 

E.  P.  BUTTON   &  COMPANY 
NEW  YORK 


Copyright,  igi; 
By  E.  p.  DUTTON  &  COMPANY 


o^ 


EDITORS^  NOTE 

This  book  is  not  expected  to  take  the  place  of  the 
War  Department  Documents  and  reguhir  courses,  which 
are  so  perfectly  and  fully  laid  out  in  various  volumes, 
except  in  the  present  emergency.  But  there  is  no  abbre- 
viated and  yet  complete  basic  course  in  one  volume  such 
as  is  made  necessary  and  desirable  to  meet  present  con- 
ditions efficiently. 

Under  supervision  of  officers  of  the  Regular  Army 
we  have  therefore  gathered  the  government  data  to- 
gether in  concise  form,  also  taking  into  account  Entente 
documents  based  on  experience  in  the  present  war,  plac- 
ing in  one  handy  pamphlet  the  essentials  of  present 
requirements  in  the  use  of  Small  Arms,  as  an  intensive 
course  to  save  time  and  obtain  uniformity  in  the  elemen- 
tary work. 

Small  Arms  Instruction  Corps 

Reginald  H.  Sayre, 

Captain,  Reserve,  N.G.N.Y. 
Stowe  Phelps, 

Ex-Captain,  Squadron  ''A,''  N.G.N.Y. 
Gerard  P.  Herrick, 

Ex-Ord.  Sergeant,  Squadron  "A,"  N.G.N.Y. 

Executive  Committee. 
October  ist,  1917. 
30  West  44th  Street,  N.  Y.  City. 

369538 


LETTER 
(Extract  from  a  Letter  to  the  Editors.) 

From  the  standpoint  of  a  former  guardsman,  gradu- 
ate of  Plattsburg,  and  Captain  in  the  National  Army, 
I  feel  confident  that  the  book  will  be  a  great  time  saver 
and  help  to  the  officers  in  the  basic  training  of  the  New 
Army  in  the  use  of  small  arms. 

In  view  of  this  fact,  I  shall  strongly  recommend  it 
to  the  serious  consideration  of  my  fellow  officers,  and 
am  only  too  glad  to  have  been  of  some  assistance. 

Alfred  Roelker, 
Captain  Cavalry,  N.  A. 
Camp  Upton, 

Long  Island,  N.  Y. 
Oct.  4th,  1917. 


INTRODUCTION 

This  volume  on  Small  Arms  has  aimed  at  a  standard- 
ized, basic  and  intensive  course  of  instruction  which  it  is 
believed  will  produce  in  the  briefest  possible  time  that 
quality  of  proficiency   demanded  by  the  present  crisis. 

Several  of  the  most  experienced  shots  and  coaches  in 
the  United  States,  working  in  conjunction  with  some 
of  the  Regular  Army  Instructors  at  the  first  Officers' 
Training  Camp  at  Plattsburg,  N.  Y.,  have  compiled 
from  twenty  or  more  works  on  Small  Arms  and  Mus- 
ketry, the  parts  vitally  applicable  to  the  present  situa- 
tion. 

The  U.  S.  Army  Manual  of  Small  Arms  Firing  has 
supplied  the  framework  of  the  book  to  which  have  been 
added  many  helpful  suggestions  from  modern  foreign 
works,  notes  from  the  Schools  of  Musketry,  Ordnance 
Pamphlets,  et  cetera.  This  matter  has  been  selected,  con- 
densed, simplified  and  formulated  for  purposes  of  in- 
tensive instruction.  Advantage  has  been  taken  of  the 
experience  gained  at  the  Officers'  Training  Camps  and  the 
time  saving  qualities  of  standardization  have  been  ap- 
plied. 

It  is  hoped  that  the  effort  and  time  spent  by  com- 
petent riflemen  and  Army  Instructors  in  compiling  this 
book  will  prove  of  assistance  to  the  officers  of  the  New 
Army,  and  will  help  them  to  proceed  to  put  their  knowl- 
edge in   form  for  the  most  efficient  instruction  in  the 

ix 


X  INTRODUCTION 

present  emergency,  without  the  loss  of  time  whi  h  would 
otherwise  be  necessary. 

In  following  this  work,  the  instructor  can  feel  confident 
that  he  is  conforming  absolutely  to  the  latest  approved 
methods  used  and  taught  in  the  U.  S.  Army. 

C.  C.  Griffith, 
Captain,  C.  A.  C,  U.  S.  A. 
Plattsburg,  N.  Y. 
Sept.  lo,  1 91 7. 


CONTENTS 

AND 

SCHEME    OF    INSTRUCTION    FOR 
INTENSIVE    COURSE 

PAGE 

General  Note xxi 

Special  Precautions xxii 

Hints  to  Instructors xxiii 

PART  I 
THE  RIFLE 

CHAPTER  I 

(Prepares  for  Official  Test  I.     See  Chapter  IX) 

NOMENCLATURE  OF  THE  RIFLE,  MODEL  1903 

SECTION  FIG.  PAGE 

1.  Parts 1&2  3 

2.  Barrel 3 

3.  Receiver 3 

4.  Bolt  Mechanism .  3 

5.  Magazine 3 

6.  Trigger 3 

7.  Sights 4 

8.  Stock 4 

9.  Ammunition .  4 

CHAPTER  II 

(Prepares  for  Official  Test  II) 

OPERATION  OF  THE  RIFLE,  MODEL  1903 

SECTION  FIG.  PAGE 

10.  Bolt  Mechanism 5 

11.  Magazine  Mechanism 6 

12.  To  Load  the  Magazine 6 

13.  To  Unload 7 

xi 


CONTENTS 


SECTION 

14.  Cut-off 

15.  Jams 

16.  To  Remove  Bolt 

17.  To  Dismount  Bolt  Mechanism 

18.  To  Assemble  Bolt  Mechanism  . 

19.  To  Dismount  Magazine  Mechanism 

20.  To  Assemble  Magazine  Mechanism 

21.  Use  of  Rifle  Sling  in  Firing       .      . 


Fi 


PAGE 

7 

7 

8 

8 

9 

10 

10 

10 


CHAPTER  III 

(Prepares  for  Official  Test  I) 

NOMENCLATURE  OF  THE  RIFLE,  MODEL  1917 

SECTION  FIG. 

22.  Parts 3a 

23.  Barrel 

24.  Receiver 

25.  Bolt  Mechanism 

26.  Magazine 

27.  Trigger . 

28.  Sights 

29.  Stock 

30.  Ammunition 

CHAPTER  IV 

(Prepares  for  Official  Test  II) 

OPERATION  OF  THE  RIFLE,  MODEL  1917 

SECTION  FI< 

31.  Bolt  Mechanism 

32.  Magazine  Mechanism 

33.  To  Load  Magazine 

34.  To  Unload 

35.  Jams 

36.  To  Remove  the  Bolt       ....... 

37.  To  Replace  the  Bolt 

38.  To  Dismount  Bolt  Mechanism       .... 

39.  To  Assemble  Bolt  Mechanism 

40.  To  Dismount  Magazine  Mechanism    . 

41.  To  Assemble  Magazine  Mechanism    . 

42.  The  Use  of  the  Rifle  Sling  in  Firmg    .     .     . 


PAGE 

13 
13 
13 
13 
13 
13 
14 
14 
14 


PAGE 

15 
16 
16 
16 
17 
17 
17 
17 
18 
19 
19 
19 


CONTENTS  xiii 

CHAPTER  V 

(Prepares  for  Official  Test  III) 

CARE  OF  THE  RIFLE  (AND  PISTOL) 

SECTION  FIG.          PAGE 

43.  Importance  of  Cleaning 20 

44.  To  Clean  Action  ana  Exterior 20 

45.  Object  of  Cleaning  the  Bore 20 

46.  To  Clean  Bore  with  Thong 20 

47.  To  Clean  Bore  with  Rod 21 

48.  To  Clean  the  Pistol 22 

49.  Important  Points 22 

CHAPTER  VI  23 
(Prepares  for  Official  Tests  VII  and  VIII) 
SIGHTING  EXERCISES 

SECTION  FIG.           PAGE 

50.  Trajectory 4              23 

51.  Line  of  Sight 5              24 

52.  Pointof  Aim 6&6a          24 

53.  Normal  Sight .  6              26 

54.  Battle  Sight 26 

55.  Important  Points 27 

56.  Sighting  Apparatus 27 

Sighting  Bar 7               28 

Target  Machine     ........  28 

Aiming  Rod  Device  (Hollifield)  ....  29 

Belgian  Aiming  Device 29 

57.  First  Sighting  Exercise  (Sighting  Bar,  Normal 

Sight) 29 

58.  Second  and  Third  Sighting  Exercises  (Com- 

bined)   Rifle,  Fixed  Rest,  Triangle   of 

Sighting 30 

59.  Fourth  Sightmg  Exercise — Canting      ...  30 

60.  Allowance  Exercise,  for  Elevation  and  Wind 

by  Aiming 32 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER  VII 

(Prepares  for  Official  Tests  V,  VI,  and  IX) 

POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILLS 

SECTION 

61.  To  Load 

62.  Exercise — ^Loading  Magazine  from  Belt 

63.  To  Unload 

64.  Position  Exercise — Standing 

65.  Muscle  Exercises  No.  1  and  No.  2 

66.  Aiming  Exercise 

67.  Trigger  Squeeze  Exercise    . 

68.  Rapid  Fire  Exercise 

69.  Position  and  Aiming  Drill,  Kneeling 

70.  Position  and  Aiming  Drill,  Sitting  Down 

71.  Position  and  Aiming  Drill,  Prone  . 

72.  Position  and  Aiming  Drill  from  Cover 

CHAPTER  VIII 

(Prepares  for  Official  Test  IV) 

DEFLECTION  AND  ELEVATION  CORRECTION  DRILLS 


FIG. 

PAGE 

8,9&9a 

34 

37 

37 

10 

37 

39 

10 

39 

41 

43 

11 

45 

47 

12 

48 

13 

51 

FIG. 


SECTION 

73.  Elevation 

74.  Windage  (Model  1903) 

76.  Rule  for  Elevation 14, 15, 16, 17 

76.  Rule  for  Windage  (Model  1903)     ....   14, 15, 16, 17 

77.  Blacking  Sights 

78.  Adjusting  Sights 

79.  Exercise  (Effect  of  Wind) 18 

CHAPTER  IX 

OFFICLAL  TESTS  AND  KNOWN  DISTANCE  FIRING  OF 

"  C.  SPECLU.  COURSE" 

SECTION 

80.  Test  I — Nomenclature 

81.  Test    II — Assemblmg    and    Dissembling    of 

Rifle 

82.  Test  III— Care  of  Rifle  ....... 

83.  Test  IV— Sight  Setting 

84.  Test  V — Firing  Positions 

85.  Test  VI— Loading  from  Belt     ..... 


PAGE 

52 


53 
53 
55 
58 
58 
58 


FIG.  IZZ  PAGE 
61 

61 
61 
61 

61 
62 


CONTENTS  XV 

SECTION  FIG.  PAGE 

86.  Test  VII— Sighting 62 

87.  Test  VIII — Aiming  Combined  with  Trigger 

Squeeze 62 

88.  Test  IX — Rapid  Loading,  Aiming  and  Firing  62 

89.  Test  X— Flinching 63 

90.  Known  Distance  Practice  Ammunition  Allow- 

ance         63 

91.  Short  Range  Practice  Conditions    ....  63 

92.  Instruction  Practice 14, 19  &  19a     63 

93.  Record  Practice 67 

94.  Mid  Range  Practice 16  67 

95.  Practice  with  Telescopic  Sights      ....  68 

96.  Combat  Practice 68 

97.  Targets 14, 19  &  19a     69 

CHAPTER  X 
GALLERY  PRACTICE 

SECTION  FIG.  PAGE 

98.  Rifle 70 

99.  Ammunition 70 

100.  Slow  Fire  Course  (prescribed  for  organized 

militia) 70 

Qualifications,  Slow  Fire 

Aiming  Bull  20 

101.  Rapid  Fire  Course  (adapted  from  C.  S.  A.  F. 

M.  6) 72 

Method  for  Rapid  Fire 
Qualifications,  Rapid  Fire 

PART  II 
AUTOMATIC  PISTOL,  CALIBER  .45 

CHAPTER  I 
NOMENCLATURE  AND  CARE  OF  THE  PISTOL 

SECTION  FIG.  PAGE 

102.  Parts 21  77 

(1)  Receiver  (4)  Slide 

(2)  Magazme  (5)  Grip  Safety 

(3)  Barrel  (6)  Safety  Lock 

103.  Ammunition  for  Automatic  Pistol       ...  78 

104.  Care  of  Pistol 78 


xvi  CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  II 
OPERATION  OF  THE  PISTOL 

SECTION  FIG. 

105.  Method  of  Operation 

106.  To  Dismount  and  Assemble  Pistol     . 

107.  Safety  Devices 

108.  Important  Points 

CHAPTER  III 
NEW  MANUAL  OF  THE  PISTOL 

SECTION  FIG. 

109.  When  the  Lanyard  Is  Used 

110.  Pistol  Being  in  Holster,  to  Raise  Pistol  .      .  22 

111.  Lower  Pistol 

112.  To  Withdraw  Magazine 

113.  To  Open  Chamber 

114.  To  Close  Chamber * 

115.  To  Insert  Magazine 

116.  To  Return  Pistol,  Being  at  Raise  Pistol     . 

117.  ToLoad 

118.  To  Unload 

119.  To  Inspect  Pistol 

120.  Precaution 

121.  The  Pistol  Is  Habitually  Carried  .... 

122.  When  Action  Seems  Imminent     .... 

123.  Recruits  Are  First  Taught 

124.  Pistol  Assumed  Loaded 


CHAPTER  IV 
MUSCLE  EXERCISES 

SECTION 

125.  In  Order  to  Shoot  Well 

126.  Fiirst  Exercise 

127.  Second  Exercise 

128.  Third  Exercise 


CONTENTS  xvii 

CHAPTER  V 
POSITION  INSTRUCTION 

SECTION  FIG.  PAGE 

129.  Position  Dismounted 93 

130.  The  Grip 93 

131.  The  Trigger-squeeze 94 

132.  Aiming 23             94 

133.  Sighting-rest 24             96 

134.  How  to  Cock  the  Pistol 96 

135.  Position  and  Aiming  Drills,  Dismounted     .  96 

Trigger-squeeze  Exercise 97 

Remarks 98 

Quick  Fire  Exercise 99 

To  Draw  and  Fire  Quickly — Snap-Shooting  99 

To  Fire  to  Right  and  Left  Front       ...  99 

CHAPTER  VI 
RANGE  PRACTICE 

SECTION  FIG.  PAGE 

136.  Slow  Fire 101 

137.  Quick  Fire 101 

138.  Automatic  Fire 102 

139.  Trench  Fire 102 

140.  Score 102 

141.  Dismounted  Course 103 

PART  III 
USE  OF  THE  RIFLE 

SECTION 

142.  General  Military  Vocabulary 

143.  Terraine  Vocabulary 

Cover — Eminences,  Land,  Profile,  Railroads, 
Roads,  Skyline,  Verdure. 

144.  Firing  Vocabulary 

Definitions 

145.  Classes  of  Fire  by  Rate 

146.  Classes  of  Fire  by  Direction 

147.  Classes  of  Fire  by  Result 


FIG. 

PAGE 

24a 

107 

111 

113 

113 

114 

is 

114 

115 

CONTENTS 


CHAPTER  I 
LOADING  AND  FIRING  COMMANDS 

SECTION  .  FIG. 

148.  To  Load  .      ,      ,      .      , 

149.  To  Unload 

150.  To  Set  the  Sight      ........ 

151.  Firmg  Commands: — 

(1)  To  Fire  by  Volley 

(2)  To  Fire  at  Will 

(3)  To  Fire  by  Clip 

(4)  To  Suspend  Firing 

(5)  To  Cease  Firing * 

(6)  Complete  Fi  ing  Command,  Including 
Designation  of  Target 

152.  Firing  Commands  by  Arm  Signals  .      . 

CHAPTER  II 
ESTIMATING  DISTANCE 

SECTION  FIG. 

153.  By  the  Eye 

154.  By  Front  Sight  Method 26  &  26a 

155.  By  Results  of  Fire 

156.  By  Range  Cards 27-28 

157.  By  Marking  Ranges 

158.  Mil  System 29-29a 


PAGE 

117 
117 
117 
117 
117 
118 
118 
118 
118 

119 
119 


PAGE 
121 

124 
125 
126 
126 
127 


CHAPTER  ni 
DESIGNATION  AND  RECOGNITION  OF  TARGETS 

SECTION 

159.  Feature  of  the  Ground  System 

160.  Horizontal  Clock-face  System 

161.  Vertical  Clock-face  System 

162.  Mil  (Sight  or  Finger)  System 

163.  Combined  Systems 

164.  Auxiliary  Aiming  Point 

165.  Instruction  Practice 

Study  and  Description  of  Ground 

Marking  Down  Enemy 

Discernment  and  Description  of  Targets 


FIG. 

PAGE 

30 

131 

31 

132 

32 

132 

53-33a 

134 

136 

34 

136 

138 

35 

138 

138 

138 

CONTENTS  xix 

CHAPTER  IV 
FIRE  DIRECTION  AND  CONTROL 

SECTION  FIG.  PAGE 

166.  Important  Elements 140 

167.  Duties  of  Fire  Commander 140 

168.  Duties  of  Platoon  Guides 142 

169.  Duties  of  Fire-Unit  Commander  ....  142 

170.  Duties  of  the  Private 144 

171.  Fire  Discipline 146 


CHAPTER  V 
NIGHT  FIRING 

SECTION  FIG.  PAGE 

172.  Instinctive  Alignment  of  Rifles     ....  148 

173.  Fixed  Rifle  Rests 148 

174.  Illuminating  Marks 148 

175.  Firing  at  Flashes 148 


CHAPTER  VI 
TACTICAL  USE  OF  RIFLE  FIRE 

SECTION  FIG.  PAGE 

176.  Immediate  Object 149 

177.  Superiority  of  Fire 149 

178.  Opening  Fire 149 

CHAPTER  VII 
THE  USE  OF  COVER 

SECTION  FIG  PAGE 

179.  General  Remarks 150 

180.  Firing  from  Cover 150 

181.  Selecting  Cover 150 

182.  Changing  Cover 150 

183.  Good  Cover 151 

184.  Poor  Cover 152 


XX  CONTENTS 

APPENDIX 
U.  S.  MAGAZINE  RIFLE,  MODEL  1898  (KRAAG) 

SECTION 

185.  Nomenclature 

186.  Assembled  Parts  and  Their  Operation  .      . 

187.  Dismounting  and  Assembling  by  Soldier     . 

188.  Precautions 

U.  S.  REVOLVER,  CALIBER  .45 

SECTION 

189.  Nomenclature 

190.  Care 

191.  Important  Points 

192.  Operation 

193.  To  Dismount  and  Assemble  Revolver     .     . 

194.  How  to  Cock  the  Revolver 

195.  Self  Cockmg  Action 

196.  Double  Action 

197.  Manual  of  the  Revolver 

198.  Firing 

199.  Muscle  Exercises 

200.  Position  Instruction 

SECTION  FIG.  PAGE 

201.  NEW  MODEL  CLIP-LOADING  DOUBLE- 

ACTION  REVOLVER  CHAMBERED  FOR 
AUTOMATIC  PISTOL  AMMUNITION  . 

202.  U.  S.  REVOLVER,  CALIBER  .38 ...      . 

203.  RANGE  PRECAUTIONS 


FIG. 

PAGE 

36 

155 

37 

155 

162 

164 

FIG. 

PAGE 

38 

165 

167 

167 

168 

168 

169 

169 

170 

171 

172 

174 

174 

39 

174 

40 

176 

177 

SMALL  ARMS  INSTRUCTORS 
MANUAL 

INTRODUCTORY 
SMALL   ARMS   INTENSIVE   COURSE 

I 
GENERAL  NOTE 

The  conditions,  training  and  development  to  become 
a  good  shot  are: 

First  of  all  it  is  necessary  for  one  to  develop  the 
muscles  used  in  firing.  After  skill  in  aiming  and  sight- 
ing is  acquired,  the  muscle  development  must  go  on  in 
combination  with  practice  in  aiming.  The  soldier  will 
soon  acquire  proficiency  in  holding  the  rifle  aimed  upon 
the  mark  and  squeezing  the  trigger,  without  losing  the 
aim.  At  this  stage,  much  has  already  been  accomplished 
toward  ultimate  proficiency.  Indoor  or  outdoor  range 
practice  will  then  show  how  well  the  ground  work  has 
iDcen  laid.  In  the  later  stages  the  soldier  must  learn  the 
influence  of  wind,  light,  mirage,  etc.,  with  the  knowledge 
and  ability  to  adjust  his  sights  accordingly.  This  will 
include  estimating  the  velocity  of  wind  and  the  effect  of 
the  same  velocity  from  the  various  angles.  It  is  of  the 
utmost  importance  that  the  riHe  he  kept  in  perfect  con- 
dition so  that  results  can  be  depended  upon. 


xxii  INTRODUCTORY 

II 
SPECIAL  PRECAUTIONS 

Do  not  point  a  weapon,  loaded  or  unloaded,  in  any 
direction  where  an  accidental  discharge  might  do  harm. 

When  first  picking  up  either  a  rifle  or  a  pistol,  see 
that  it  is  not  loaded. 

With  the  rifle,  pull  back  the  bolt  smartly,  see  that 
there  is  no  cartridge  in  the  breech  (if  necessary,  insert- 
ing the  little  finger).  Also  see  that  the  magazine  is 
empty. 

With  the  pistol,  take  out  the  magazine,  draw  back  the 
slide  and  see  that  there  is  no  cartridge  in  the  breech 
or  in  the  magazine.    Insert  the  magazine. 

When  the  rifle  or  pistol  is  carried  loaded,  the  safety 
lock  should  be  at  "safe." 

Under  no  circumstances  should  the  firing  pin  be  let 
down  by  hand  on  a  cartridge. 

When  loading  from  the  magazine,  to  obtain  positive 
ejection,  and  to  insure  the  bolt  catching  the  top  cartridge 
in  the  magazine,  the  bolt  must  be  drawn  fully  to  the 
rear. 

It  is  essential  for  the  proper  working  and  protection 
of  all  cams  that  they  be  kept  well  cleaned  and  lubri- 
cated. 

See  that  the  cartridges  are  kept  free  from  grit  or  dust 
and  do  not  corrode  in  the  clips. 

Never  leave  a  rag  in  the  barrel. 

In  case  of  a  misfire,  it  is  unsafe  to  raise  the  bolt 
handle  immediately,  as  it  may  be  a  case  of  hang  fire. 
In  such  cases,  wait  a  few  seconds,  when  the  bolt  may  be 
opened  with  perfect  safety. 


INTRODUCTORY  xxUi 

III 
HINTS  TO   INSTRUCTORS 

The  purpose  in  the  fire  training  of  a  company  should 
be  to  produce  uniform  proficiency  rather  than  expert- 
ness  on  the  part  of  a  few. 

The  attention  of  the  instructor  should  be  concen- 
trated on  the  poorer  shots  and  he  should  be  particular 
to  avoid  discouraging  them. 

Be  careful  to  refrain  from  any  form  of  comment  that 
may  dishearten  the  recruit. 

Faults  must  not,  however,  be  overlooked  or  allowed 
to  become  formed  habits. 

The  instructor  should  avoid  keeping  the  squad  in 
tiring  positions  while  making  explanations  or  correcting 
errors. 

Until  the  soldier  has  heard  a  thing  at  least  three  times 
he  will  not  remember  it. 

In  the  early  part  of  the  training,  unless  for  some  spe- 
cial reason,  squads  will  not  consist  of  more  than  seven 
men  who  will  be  assembled  around  the  instructor  in 
a  semicircle. 

The  key  notes  of  instruction  are 

1.  Explain 

2.  Illustrate 

3.  Get   imitation 

4.  Test 

Explanations  are  necessary,  but  they  should  be  lim- 
ited to  short  explicit  statements.  Chief  reliance  how- 
ever should  be  placed  upon  practical  demonstration. 


xxiv  INTRODUCTORY 

Formal  commands  are  seldom  required  except  in  col- 
lective firing  instruction ;  the  motions  of  firing*  being 
usually  performed  independently,  and  eventually  each 
man  will  be  required  to  use  his  own  judgment. 

Accuracy  should  be  emphasized  at  all  stages  of  train- 
ing before  rapidity. 

The  essential  points  of  the  firing  positions  are  to  be 
insisted  upon  from  the  beginning  as  the  foundations  of 
fire  discipline. 

The  importance  of  Sighting,  and  Position  and  AiiJling 
Drills  cannot  be  too  persistently  impressed  upon  the  sol- 
dier. If  these  exercises  are  carefully  practiced,  the  sol- 
dier, before  firing  a  shot  at  a  target,  will  have  learned 
to  aim  his  piece  correctly,  to  hold  his  rifle  steadily,  to 
squeeze  the  trigger  properly,  to  assume  the  position  best 
adapted  to  the  particular  conformation  of  his  body,  and 
will  have  acquired  the  quickness  in  manual  dexterity  re- 
quired for  handling  the  piece  in  rapid  fire.  This  knowl- 
edge cannot  be  so  successfully  acquired  upon  the  target 
ground. 


PART  I 
THE  RIFLE 

Note — Chapters  I  to  VIII  inclusive  prepare  for  the 
Intensive  Course  or  new  *'C  SPECIAL  COURSE,"  pre- 
scribed by  the  War  Department  to  be  used  for  the  Na- 
tional Army,  which  is  designated  as  ''Changes^'  to  be 
added  to  Appendix  II,  S.A.F.M.,  1913,  and  given  in 
Chapter  IX. 

"This  course  will  be  prescribed  for  the  quick  training  of 
troops  in  rifle  practice,  when  time  or  facilities  for  the  regular 
courses  are  not  available. 

"Success  cannot  be  expected,  nor  can  proficiency  in  rifle 
practice  be  attained  by  a  company  in  this  course,  unless  it 
has  been  thoroughly  instructed  and  each  man  should  satis- 
factorily pass  the  prescribed  tests  (given  in  Chapter  IX)  be- 
fore he  fires  a  shot  on  the  range.  Without  this  thorough 
,  preliminary  course,  and  satisfactorily  passing  these  tests,  it 
is  a  waste  of  ammunition  to  let  the  soldier  fire  ball  cartridges 
on  the  range." 


CHAPTER  I 

(Prepares  for  Official  Test  L    See  Chap.  IX) 

NOMENCLATURE  OF  THE  RIFLE, 
MODEL  1903 

U.  S.  Rifle,  Caliber  .30,  Model  1903,  for  1906  Ammunitioii 
(Figs.  1  and  2.) 

(See  War  Document,  No,  ip2j,  for  fuller  description) 

1.  PARTS.  The  Rifle  consists  of  93  parts,  of  which 
the  chief  are : 

2.  BARREL.  Muzzle,  Breech,  Chamber,  Bore  (.30), 
Lands,  Grooves. 

3.  RECEIVER.  Magazine  Opening  and  Cut-off, 
Clip-slots,  Bolt-stop,  Ejector. 

4.  BOLT  MECHANISM.  Bolt,  Handle,  Locking-lugs, 
Safety-lug,  Sleeve,  Sleeve-lock,  Firing-pin,  Firing-pin- 
sleeve,  Striker,  Main-spring,  Cocking-piece,  Extractor, 
Extractor-collar,  Safety-lock. 

5.  MAGAZINE.  Floor-plate,  Magazine-spring,  Fol- 
lower. 

6.  TRIGGER.  The  lever  used  to  release  the  Firing- 
pin  and  fire  the  rifle. 

3 


4         WOMElsrCLATyRE   QF   RIFLE,  MODEL   1903 

7.  SIGHTS.     The  Front  Sight. 

The  Kear  Sight  consists  principally  of:  A  Movable 
Base  with  a  Windage  Screw  and  a  Hinged  Leaf  with 
Open  Battle  Sight  for  use  when  the  Leaf  is  down. 
When  vertical,  the  Leaf  exposes  the  Drift  Slide  (or 
Elevation  Slide)  with  a  Peep-hole,  a  Field  View  or  tri- 
angle open-sight  just  above,  and  another  open  sight 
above  that,  all  three  located  in  the  movable  Drift  Slide 
for  altering  Elevation.  The  Leaf  is  graduated  from 
100  to  2,850  yards.  The  lines  just  below  the  numbers 
are  100  yard  divisions,  the  longer  of  the  short  lines  are 
50  yard,  and  the  shorter,  25  yard  divisions. 

8.  STOCK.  Butt,  Small  of  Stock,  Balance  and  Hand- 
guard  ;  two  Sling  Swivels  and  a  Leather  Sling ;  a  Stack- 
ing Swivel  near  the  muzzle;  Butt  Plate  with  receptacle 
for  Oiler  arid  Thong  Case  or  'Tull-through"  Container. 
This  oil  is  for  lubricating  working  parts  only. 

9.  AMMUNITION.  Model  1906,  Caliber  .30,  Ball 
Cartridge,  consisting  of  Case,  Primer,  Charge  of  smoke- 
less powder  and  Bullet.  Muzzle  velocity  2700  feet  per 
second. 


CHAPTER  II 

{Prepares  for  OMcial  Test  II) 

OPERATION  OF  THE  RIFLE,  MODEL  1903 

10.  BOLT  MECHAinSM:.  The  bolt  mechanism  moves 
backward  and  forward  and  rotates  in  the  well  of 
the  receiver.  When  the  rifle  is  used  as  a  single  loader, 
the  bolt  carries  a  cartridge,  placed  by  the  hand  in  front 
of  it,  into  the  chamber.  When  used  for  magazine  fire, 
the  effect  of  drawing  the  bolt  all  the  way  to  the  rear 
and  forcing  it  forward,  is  to  cock  the  piece,  eject  a  car- 
tridge, and  place  another  cartridge  in  the  chamber. 

The  piece  being  loaded  and  cocked,  is  ready  to  be 
fired,  if  the  Safety-lock  is  turned  to  the  left  showing 
Ready.  To  prevent  the  piece  from  being  fired,  turn  the 
Safety-lock  all  the  way  to  the  right  showing  the  word 
Safe.  This  can  be  done  only  when  the  piece  is  cocked. 
Also,  while  the  Safety-lock  is  in  a  vertical  position,  the 
rifle  cannot  be  fired. 

The  bolt  mechanism  operates  as  follows:  To  open 
the  bolt,  raise  the  handle  as  far  as  possible  and  pull 
directly  to  the  rear  until  it  is  stopped. 

To  close  the  bolt,  push  the  handle  vigorously  straight 
forward  as  far  as  it  will  go,  and  turn  the  handle  down, 
being  careful  not  to  jam  the  bolt  by  lateral -pressure. 


6         OPERATION  OF  THE  RIFLE,  MODEL  1903 

The  piece  may  be  cocked  either  by  raising  the  bolt 
handle  and  then  immediately  turning  it-  down,  or  by 
pulling  the  cocking-piece  directly  to  the  rear  until  it 
catches.  The  bolt-handle  must  be  turned  all  the  way 
down  before  firing.  The  opening  and  closing  of  the 
bolt  should  each  be  done  by  one  continuous  motion 
and  practiced  frequently  for  rapid  firing. 

11.  MAGAZINE  MECHANISM.  The  magazine 
mechanism  includes  the  Floor-plate,  Follower,  Magazine- 
spring,  Cut-off. 

.    The  magazine  will  contain  as  many  as  5  cartridges  and 
feed  them,  one  by  one,  as  wanted,  to  the  barrel  chamber. 

12.  TO  LOAD  THE  MAGAZINE.  See  that  the  cut- 
off is  up,  showing  On^  and  draw  the  bolt  fully  to  the 
rear.  Place  either  end  of  the  loaded  clip  in  the  clip 
slot  in  the  receiver,  and  with  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand 
near  the  base  of  the  cartridge,  press  smartly  down  into 
the  magazine  until  the  top  cartridge  is  caught  by  the 
right  edge  of  the  receiver.  The  magazine  can  be  filled, 
if  empty  or  partly  filled,  by  inserting  cartridges  one  by 
one. 

Pushing  the  bolt  forward,  after  loading  the  maga- 
zine, ejects  the  clip  and  puts  one  cartridge  into  the  cham- 
ber, leaving  four  only  in  the  magazine. 

To  Put  Five  Cartridges  in  the  Magazine  and  One  in  the 
Barrel.  Proceed  as  in  paragraph  'To  Load  the  Magazine," 
but  remove  clip  by  hand;  then  push  down  and  hold  top 
cartridge  with  thumb  of  the  left  hand  while  advancing 
the  bolt  about  half  an  inch,  and  turn  magazine  cut-off 
Off;  then  with  the  right  hand,  insert  another  cartridge  in 
the  barrel  and  close  bolt. 


OPERATION  OF  THE  RIFLE,  MODEL  1903        7 

13.  TO  UNLOAD.  See  that  the  magazine  cut-off 
Thumb-piece  is  up,  which  puts  the  magazine  On.  Turn 
Safety  up  and  move  bolt  alternately  backward  and  for- 
ward until  all  the  cartridges  are  ejected. 

After  the  last  cartridge  is  ejected,  the  follower  rises 
and  holds  the  bolt  open  to  show  that  the  magazine  is 
empty,  the  chamber  is  then  closed  by  pressing  the  fol- 
lower down  as  the  bolt  is  pushed  forward,  to  free  the 
bolt,  and  thrusting  the  bolt  home.  The  Safety  is  turned 
to  Ready  and  the  trigger  is  pulled. 

14.  CTJT-OFF.  When  the  cut-off  is  turned  down,  the 
magazine  is  Off,  and  the  rifle  converted  into  a  single 
loader,  whether  the  magazine  is  full  or  empty. 

When  the  cut-off  is  turned  up,  the  magazine  is  On 
(the  bolt,  can  be  drawn  fully  to  the  rear,  permitting 
the  top  cartridge  to  rise  high  enough  to  be  caught  in  its 
forward  movement).  As  the  bolt  is  closed,  this  car- 
tridge is  pushed  forward  into  the  chamber,  being  held 
up  during  its  passage  by  the  pressure  of  those  below. 
The  last  one  in  the  magazine  is  held  up  by  the  follower, 
the  rib  on  which  directs  it  into  the  chamber. 

When  the  bolt  is  closed,  the  cut-off  may  be  turned 
up  or  down.  Wlien  the  bolt  is  in  its  rearmost  position, 
to  pass  from  the  Loading  from  the  Magazine  to  Single 
Loading,  it  is  necessary  to  force  the  top  cartridge  or  fol- 
lower below  the  reach  of  the  bolt,  to  push  the  bolt 
slightly  forward  and  to  turn  the  cut-off  down,  showing 
Off. 

15.  JAMS.  If  cartridges  jam,  take  out  magazine,  as 
described  hereafter  under  "To  Dismount  Magazine 
Mechanism.'' 


8  OPERATION  OF  THE  RIFLE,  MODEL  1903 

16.  TO  EEJVTOVE  THE  BOLT.  Place  the  cut-off  at 
the  center  notch ;  cock  the  arm  and  turn  the  safety  lock 
to  a  vertical  position,  raise  the  bolt  handle  and  draw  out 
the  bolt. 

17.  TO  DISMOUNT  BOLT  MECHANISM.  To  take 
bolt  apart  proceed  as  follows : 

Hold  bolt  in  the  left  hand,  press  sleeve  lock  with  the 


STBOER. 


Fig.   3.- 


-Disconnecting   Striker   and   Firing   Pin, 
Model   1903. 


thumb   of   right  hand  to  unlock  sleeve   from  bolt,   and 
unscrew  sleeve  by  turning  to  the  left. 
Hold  sleeve  in  left  hand  and  draw  cocking-piece  back 


OPERATION  OF  THE  RIFLE,  MODEL  1903         9 

with  middle  finger  and  thumb  of  right  hand,  turn  safety 
lock  down  to  the  left  with  the  forefinger  of  the  right 
liand  in  order  to  allow  the  cocking  piece  to  move  forward 
in  sleeve,  thus  partially  relievingnhe  tension  of  main 
spring.  With  the  cocking  piece  against  the  breast,  draw 
back  the  firing  pin  sleeve  with  the  forefinger  and  thumb 
of  right  hand  and  hold  it  in  this  position  (Fig.  3),  while 
removing  the  striker  with  the  left  hand ;  remove  firing  pin 
sleeve  and  mainspring;  pull  firing  pin  out  of  sleeve. 

Pick  up  bolt,  turn  the  extractor  to  the  right,  forcing 
its  tongue  out  of  its  groove  in  the  front  of  the  bolt  and 
force  the  extractor  forward  and  off  the  bolt  with  the 
thumb  of  the  right  hand. 

18.  TO  ASSEMBLE  BOLT  MECHANISM.  Grasp  with 
the  left  hand  the  rear  of  the  bolt,  handle  up,  and  turn 
the  extractor  collar  with  the  thumb  and  forefinger  of  the 
right  hand  until  its  lug  is  on  a  line  with  the  safety  lug 
on  the  bolt;  take  the  extractor  in  the  right  hand  and 
insert  the  lug  on  the  collar  in  the  undercuts  in  the  ex- 
tractor by  pushing  the  extractor  to  the  rear  until  its 
tongue  comes  in  contact  with  the  rim  on  the  face  of  the 
bolt  (a  slight  pressure  with  the  left  thumb  on  the  top 
of  the  rear  part  of  the  extractor  assists  in  this  opera- 
tion) ;  turn  the  extractor  to  the  right  until  it  is  over  the 
right  lug;  take  the  bolt  in  the  right  hand  and  press  the 
hook  of  the  extractor  against  the  butt  plate  or  some 
rigid  object,  until  the  tongue  on  the  extractor  enters  its 
groove  in  the  bolt. 

With  the  safety  lock  turned  down  to  the  left  to  per- 
mit the  firing  pin  to  enter  the  sleeve  as  far  as  possible, 
assemble  the  sleeve  and  firing  pin,  place  the  cocking  piece 
against  the  breast  and  put  on   main  spring,  firing-pin- 


10       OPERATION  OF  THE  RIFLE,  MODEL  1903 

sleeve,  and  striker.  Hold  the  cocking  piece  between  the 
thumb  and  forefinger  of  the  left  hand,  and  by  pressing 
the  striker  point  against  some  substance  not  hard  enough 
to  injure  it,  force  tUfe  cocking  piece  back  until  the  safety 
lock  can  be  turned  to  the  vertical  position  with  the  right 
hand;  insert  the  firing-pin  in  the  bolt  and  screw  up  the 
sleeve  (by  turning  it  to  the  right)  until  the  sleeve  lock 
enters  its  notch  on  the  bolt. 

See  that  the  cut-off  is  at  the  center  notch;  hold  the 
piece  under  floor  plate  in  the  fingers  of  the  left  hand,  the 
thumb  extending  over  the  left  side  of  the  receiver ;  take 
bolt  in  right  hand  with  safety  lock  in  a  vertical  position 
and  safety  lug  up ;  press  rear  end  of  follower  down  with 
left  thumb  and  push  bolt  into  the  receiver;  lower  bolt 
handle;  turn  safety  lock  and  cut-off  down  to  the  left 
with  right  hand. 

19.  TO      DISMOUNT      MAGAZINE      MECHANISM. 

With  the  bullet  end  of  a  cartridge  press  on  the  floor 
plate  catch  (through  the  hole  in  the  floor  plate),  at  the 
same  time  drawing  the  bullet  to  the  rear;  this  releases 
the  floor  plate.  If  it  sticks,  strike  it  toward  the  butt 
with  the  flat  of  the  hand. 

20.  TO  ASSEMBLE  MAGAZINE  MECHANISM.  Re- 
verse operation  of  dismounting. 

21.  THE  USE  or  THE  RIFLE  SLING  IN  FIRING. 

The  gun  sling  may  be  used  to  steady  the  aim  in  the  va- 
rious positions  but  is  seldom  used  in  field  service.  It  is 
adjusted  as  follows:  Release  the  outside  hook  and 
fasten  it  in  the  holes  nearest  to  the  butt  swivel.  Re- 
lease the  other  hook  (of  the  other  strap)  and  readjust 
it  near  the  end  so  that  the  loop  will  be  about  opposite  the 


OPERATION  OF  THE  RIFLE,  MODEL  1903       11 

comb  of  the  stock.  The  length  must  be  adjusted  to  the 
arm.  Holding  the  rifle  in  the  right  hand  at  the  small 
of  the  stock,  pass  the  left  arm  through  the  upper  loop 
beyond  the  elbow;  then  pass  the  left  hand  under  the 
stock,  grasping  the  stock  with  the  left  hand  in  front 
of  the  trigger  guard,  the  straps  passing  to  the  right 
of  the  wrist.  Take  up  slack  in  the  sling  by  drawing 
back  the  left  arm  and  pressing  the  wrist  to  the  right. 
Be  careful  to  exert  the  same  pressure  for  each  shot. 
Adjust  position  to  one  of  ease,  firmness  and  steadiness. 


.  ^b» 


I 


12 


CHAPTER  III 
{Prepares  for  Official  Test  I.    See  Chapter  IX) 

NOMENCLATURE  OF  THE  RIFLE,  MODEL 

1917 

U.  S.  Rifle,  Caliber  .30,  Model  1917,  for  1906  Ammunition 
(Fig.  3a.) 

22.  PAETS.  The  Rifle  consists  of  86  parts  of  which 
the  chief  are : 

23.  BARREL.  Muzzle,  Breech,  Chamber,  Bore 
(.30),  Lands,  Grooves.  (Lands  and  grooves,  5  in  num- 
ber, are  of  equal  width  and  make  one  turn  in  10"  left 
handed.) 

24.  RECEIVER.  Magazine-opening,  Clip-slots,  Bolt- 
stop  (attached  to  left  rear  end  of  the  receiver).  Ejector, 
Safety-lock  (attached  to  right  and  rear  end  of  receiver). 

25.  BOLT  MECHANISM.  Bolt,  Handle,  Locking- 
lugs,  Sleeve,  Striker,  Main-spring,  Cocking-piece  witl? 
Dismounting-hook,  Extractor,  Extractor-collar. 

26.  MAGAZINE.  Floor-plate,  Magazine-spring,  Fol- 
lower. 

27.  TRIGGER.  The  lever  used  to  release  the  Striker 
and  fire  the  rifle — (Sear,  Sear-spring  and  Safety-stud 
are  actuated  by  trigger). 

13 


14       NOMENCLATURE   OF   RIFLE,   MODEL   1917 

28.  SIGHTS.     The  Front  Sight. 

The  Rear  Sight  has  no  allowance  for  drift  nor  adjust- 
ment for  wind  but  consists  of  a  Hinged  Leaf  with  a 
Slide,  with  a  "Peep"  in  it.  The  slide  is  latched  by  a 
Spring  Catch  in  adjustable  positions  on  the  leaf  for  dif- 
ferent ranges.  The  ranges  on  the  leaf  are  from  200  to 
1600  yards,  with  notches  for  each  hundred  yard  "set- 
ting." The  "setting"  for  the  range  is  read  from  the 
lines  in  the  beveled  opening  near  the  top  of  the  slide, 
which  are  aligned  with  lines  on  the  leaf  opposite  the 
numbers  designating  the  hundreds  of  yards. 

The  leaf  carries  a  Battle  Sight  which  is  a  "peep" 
formed  on  the  leaf  and  which  is  in  position  when  the 
leaf  is  laid  down.  The  fixed  sighted  range  of  this  Battle 
Sight  is  400  yards. 

29.  STOCK.  Butt,  Small  of  Stock,  Pistol  Grip,  Bal- 
ance and  Hand  Guard ;  two  Sling  Swivels  and  a  Leather 
Sling;  a  Stacking  Swivel  near  the  muzzle.  Butt  Plate 
with  receptacle  for  Oiler  and  Thong  (or  "Pull- 
Through")  container.  This  oil  is  for  lubricating  work- 
ing parts  only. 

30.  AMMUNITION.  Model  1906,  Caliber  .30,  Ball 
Cartridge,  consisting  of  Case,  Primer,  Charge  of  smoke- 
less powder  and  Bullet.  Standard  muzzle  velocity  about 
2700  feet  per  second. 


CHAPTER  IV 

(Prepares  for   Official   Test  II) 

OPERATION  OF  THE  RIFLE,  MODEL  1917 

31.  BOLT  MECHANISM.  The  bolt  mechanism  moves 
backward  and  forward  and  rotates  in  the  well  of 
the  Receiver  when  the  magazine  is  full.  The  effect  of 
drawing  the  bolt  all  the  way  to  the  rear  and  then  forc- 
ing it  forward,  and  the  handle  down,  is  to  eject  a  car- 
tridge and  place  another  cartridge  in  the  chamber  and 
cock  the  piece.  The  piece  when  loaded  and  cocked  is 
ready  to  be  fired  if  the  Safety-lock  is  left  "forward.'* 
To  prevent  the  piece  from  being  fired,  turn  the  Safety- 
lock  ''back"  and  down.  This  can  be  done  only  when 
the  piece  is  cocked. 

The  bolt  mechanism  operates  as  follows : 

To  open  the  bolt,  raise  the  handle  as  far  as  possible, 
and  pull  directly  to  the  rear  until  it  is  stopped. 

To  close  the  bolt,  push  the  handle  vigorously  straight 
forward  as  far  as  it  will  go,  and  turn  the  handle  down 
strongly,  being  careful  not  to  jam  the  bolt  by  lateral 
pressure.  The  piece  is  cocked  by  raising  the  bolt  handle 
and  drawing  the  bolt  back  about  i"  (or  until  a  distinct 
snap  is  heard)  then  forcing  bolt  forward  and  handle 
down  into  position.    The  bolt  handle  must  be  turned  all 

15 


i6       OPERATION   OF   THE   RIFLE,  MODEL  1917 

the  way  down  before  firing,  for  otherwise  the  safety 
stud  on  the  sear  will  not  enter  the  interlock  slot  on 
the  bolt  and  the  trigger  cannot  be  pulled. 

32.^  MAGAZINE  MECHANISM.  The  magazine  will 
contain  as  many  as  five  cartridges  and  feed  them  one 
by  one,  as  wanted,  to  the  barrel  chamber. 

33.  TO  LOAD  THE  MAGAZINE.  Draw  the  bolt  fully 
to  the  rear.     Place  either  end  of  the  loaded  clip  in  the 

•  clip  slot  of  the  receiver  and  with  the  thumb  of  the  right 
hand  near  the  base  of  the  cartridge,  press  smartly  down 
into  the  magazine  until  the  top  cartridge  is  caught  by  the 
right  edge  of  the  receiver.  The  magazine  can  be  filled, 
if  empty  or  partly  filled,  by  inserting  cartridges  one  by 
one.  Pushing  the  bolt  forward,  after  loading  the  maga- 
zine, ejects  the  clip,  puts  one  cartridge  into  the  chamber 
and  cocks  the  piece. 

To  Put  Five  Cartridges  in  the  Magazine  and  One  in  the 
Barrel.  Proceed  as  in  paragraph  'To  Load  the  Magazine," 
but  remove  clip  by  hand,  then  push  down  top  cartridge 
and  hold  it  with  thumb  of  left  hand,  while  advancing 
the  bolt  about  half  an  inch ;  then,  with  the  right  hand, 
insert  another  cartridge  in  the  barrel  and  close  the  bolt. 

34.  TO  UNLOAD.  Put  the  Safety  forward  and  move 
the  bolt  alternately  backward  and  forward  until  all  the 
cartridges  are   ejected. 

After  the  last  cartridge  is  ejected,  the  follower  rises 
and  holds  the  bolt  open  to  show  that  the  magazine  is 
empty.  The  chamber  is  closed  by  pressing  the  follower 
down,  as  the  bolt  is  pushed  forward,  to  free  the  bolt, 
and  by  thrusting  the  bolt  home ;  and  the  trigger  is  pulled 
to  leave  the  piece  uncocked. 


OPERATION  OF  THE  RIFLE,  MODEL  1917        17 

35.  JAMS.  If  cartridges  jam,  take  out  magazine,  as 
described  hereafter,  under  ''To  Dismount  Magazine 
Mechanism.'* 

36.  TO  REMOVE  THE  BOLT.  (Note:  See  that  the 
chamber  and  magazine  are  empty.)  With  the  Safety  in 
the  forward  position,  raise  the  bolt  handle ;  then  with  the 
left,  first  finger  and  thumb,  hold  out  the  Bolt  Stop  and 
draw  the  bolt  directly  back  and  out.  During  this  opera- 
tion the  rifle  may  be  supported  on  the  knees  or  by  hold- 
ing the  butt  under  the  right  arm  pit. 

37.  TO  REPLACE  THE  BOLT.  Reverse  the  opera- 
tions, lining  up  the  extractor  with  the  solid  lug  on  the 
end  of  bolt. 

38.  TO  DISMOUNT  BOLT  MECHANISM.  The  bolt 
having  been  removed,  grip  the  rear  end  of  the  bolt  in 
the  right  hand  and  with  the  left  thumb,  pressing  on 
the  extractor  ring,  rotate  the  bolt  in  an  anti-clockwise 
direction  until  the  extractor  is  in  line  with  the  gas  escape 
hole.  This  raises  the  tongue  on  the  extractor  out  of 
the  groove  at  the  front  end  of  the  bolt.  The  extractor 
can  then  be  pushed  forward  and  off  by  the  right  thumb. 

Hook  a  loop  of  string  or  the  ''cleaning  thong"  on  the 
dismounting  hot)k,  which  is  on  the  cocking  piece  lug,  and, 
holding  the  bolt  in  the  left  hand  and  the  string  in  the 
right,  draw  the  cocking  piece  to  the  rear  until  the  lug 
clears  the  end  of  the  bolt.  Then,  by  a  rotary  movement 
of  the  right  hand  counterclockwise,  unscrew  the  sleeve 
from  the  bolt  and  withdraw  the  sleeve,  cocking  piece 
and  striker  from  the  bolt.  Grasp  the  sleeve  with  the 
left  hand,  and,  while  holding  the  point  of  the  striker 
against  a  piece  of  wood  or  a  similar  surface,  force  the 


i8       OPERATION   OF  THE   RIFLE,  MODEL   1917 

sleeve  toward  the  point  of  striker,  compressing  the  main- 
spring until  the  lug  on  the  cocking  piece  clears  the  lug 
slot  in  the  sleeve.  Then  give  the  cocking  piece  a  quarter 
turn  in  either  direction  to  disengage  it  from  the  striker, 
and  draw  it  off  the  rear.  Relieve  the  spring  from  stress 
slowly  and  remove  it  and  the  sleeve  from  the  striker. 

39.  TO  ASSEMBLE  BOLT  MECHANISM.  Slide  the 
main  spring  over  the  striker.  Hold  the  point  of  the 
striker  against  a  piece  of  wood  or  a  similar  surface  and, 
placing  the  sleeve  against  the  end  of  the  spring,  with 
the  flats  in  the  bore  registering  with  the  flats  in  the 
striker,  compress  the  spring  by  forcing  the  sleeve  toward 
the  point  of  the  striker.  Holding  the  sleeve  with  the 
spring  fully  compressed,  replace  the  cocking  piece  on 
the  end  of  the  striker,  locking  it  by  a  quarter  turn  so 
that  its  lug  aligns  with  the  lug-slot  in  the  sleeve.  Then 
let  the  sleeve  return  to  position  slowly  under  the  action 
of  the  spring.  Holding  the  bolt  in  the  left  hand,  start 
the  threads  on  the  barrel  of  the  sleeve  into  the  threads 
in  the  end  of  the  bolt.  Holding  a  loop  of  string  in 
the  right  hand  as  before,  hook  it  on  the  dismounting 
hook  and  draw  the  cocking  piece  outwardly.  Then,  by 
a  clockwise  rotary  movement  of  the  right  hand,  screw 
the  sleeve  home  on  the  bolt.  Place  the  lug  in  the  half 
cock  notch.  Slide  the  extractor  to  place  in  line  with 
the  gas  escape  holes,  engaging  the  undercut  lug  on  the 
extractor  with  the  ears  on  the  ring  and  lifting  the  hook 
so  that  the  tongue  will  slide  over  the  end  of  the  bolt. 
To  assist  in  this  operation,  press  down  on  the  extractor 
with  the  right  thumb  half  way  between  the  "Extractor 
Lug"  and  the  ''Back  Rest/'  Turn  the  extractor  so  that 
it  lies  over  the  unslotted  or  solid  lug  and  replace  the 


OPERATION  OF  THE  RIFLE,  MODEL  1917       ig 

bolt  in  the  receiver.    Push  the  follower  down  and  close 
and  lock  the  bolt  and  pull  the  trigger. 

40.  TO  DISMOUNT  MAGAZINE  MECHANISM. 
With  the  bullet  end  of  a  cartridge,  press  on  the  floor 
plate  catch  (through  the  hole  in  the  floor  plate)  at  the 
same  time  drawing  the  bullet  to  the  rear;  this  releases 
the  floor  plate.  If  it  sticks,  strike  it  towards  the  butt 
with  the  flat  of  the  hand.  Pull  the  ends  of  the  spring 
from  the  undercuts  on  the  follower  and  floor  plate.  The 
narrower  end  of  the  spring  will  be  found  on  the  follower. 

41.  TO  ASSEMBLE  MAGAZINE  MECHANISM.  Re- 
verse the  operation  of  dismounting. 

42.  THE  USE  OF  THE  RIFLE  SLING  IN  FIRING. 
See  last  section  in  Chapter  II. 


CHAPTER  V 

(Prepares  for  Official  Test  III) 

CARE  OF  THE  RIFLE  AND  PISTOL 

43.  IMPORTANCE  OF  CLEANING.  The  care  of  the 
rifle  and  pistol  is  of  the  utmost  importance.  Beyond  or- 
dinary caution,  it  principally  consists  of  cleaning  thor- 
oughly after  firing,  as  the  powder  gases  are  highly  cor- 
rosive. 

They  should  be  cleaned  immediately  after  each  day's 
shooting  in  the  field,  (as  well  as  at  noon,,  when  shooting 
on  a  range,)  and  daily  for  several  days  thereafter. 

If  not  possible  to  clean  the  rifle  immediately,  pull 
through  an  oily  rag  and  clean  at  first  opportunity. 

The  worst  part  of  the  powder  fouling  cannot  be  seen, 
nor  be  removed  by  oil. 

44.  TO  CLEAN  THE  ACTION  AND  EXTERIOR  OF 
THE  RIFLE.  Clean  bolt,  magazine  and  exterior  with 
any  oily  rag,  wiping  off  surplus. 

45.  OBJECT  OF  CLEANING  THE  BORE.  To  re- 
move the  fouling  to  get  a  chemically  clean  surface,  and 
then  cover  this  surface  with  a  film  of  oil  to  prevent 
rusting. 

46.  TO  CLEAN  THE  BORE  WITH  WEIGHT,  THONG 
AND   BRUSH   OR    GAUZE.      First    Method    (Pozvder 

20 


CARE  OF  THE  RIFLE  AND  PISTOL  21 

Fouling)  :  If  possible,  plug  bore  at  breech  and  fill  with 
soda  solution  and  leave  to  soak  for  twenty  minutes  to 
remove  powder  fouling,  then  wash  out  with  clean  water, 
or 

Second  Method:  With  well  oiled  brush  or  gauze, 
drop  the  weight  through  from  breech  and  pull  through 
three  or  four  times.  Wipe  dry  with  cloth  patch  of  a 
size  to  pass  snugly  but  easily  through  the  bore.  Then, 
either  swab  out  three  or  four  times  with  patches  soaked 
in  "Hoppe  No.  9"  solution,  or  pour  through  from  the 
breech  five  or  six  pints  of  very  hot  or  soapy  water, 
being  careful  not  to  get  it  into  the  mechanism. 

After  either  method,  dry  thoroughly  until  patches 
come  out  "clean,''  or  continue  to  come  out  with  a  bluish 
green  stain.  By  ''clean"  is  meant  not  absolutely  free 
from  discoloration,  but  free  from  evidence  of  powder  or 
metal  fouling. 

If  these  dry  patches  come  out  clean,  run  through  an 
oily  rag,  or 

If  these  dry  patches  do  not  come  out  clean,  but 
continue  to  come  out  with  a  bluish  green  stain,  this 
shows  Metal  Fouling  from  the  bullet,  then  pull  through 
an  oily  rag  and  take  the  rifle  to  the  armorer  at  the  first 
opportunity. 

The  ammonia  or  other  special  solutions  for  removing 
Metal  Folding  should  only  be  used  by  experienced  men. 

47.  TO  CLEAN  THE  BORE  WITH  A  ROD  INSTEAD 
OF  THONG.  Proceed  as  above  except  that  the  liquids 
can  be  pumped  up  into  the  barrel  with  the  rod  and  a 
rag  from  a  can,  and  the  bore  scrubbed.  Always  insert 
the  rod  from  the  breech  after  removing  the  bolt,  so  as  to 
avoid  wear  or  injury  to  rifle  at  the  muzzle. 


22  CARE  OF  THE  RIFLE  AND  PISTOL 

After  firing,  clean  the  rifle  daily  for  several  days  and 
until,  after  the  oil  is  wiped  out,  the  first  dry  patch  comes 
out  clean, 

48.  TO  CLEAN  THE  PISTOL.  The  above  principles 
apply  also  for  the  Automatic  Pistol.  Also  clean  the 
chamber  of  the  pistol,  using  the  soda  solution. 

49.  IMPORTANT  POINTS.  Never  leave  rag  or  other 
plug  in.  the  barrel  to  avoid  blowing  up  the  piece  or  caus- 
ing rust  by  holding  moisture  between  the  oily  rag  and 
the  bore. 

Keep  sight  lowered  when  not  in  use. 

Keep  piece  uncocked  except  when  loaded. 

For  trouble  with  trigger  pull,  take  rifle  to  the  armorer. 

Cartridges  are  kept  in  magazine  only  when  necessary. 

Bolts  are  not  to  be  exchanged  except  to  try  and  extract 
a  stuck  cartridge. 

If  necessary  in  muddy  or  dusty  country,  cover  muzzle 
and  mechanism  with  a  cloth  or  old  sock  but  never  put  a 
plug  in  the  muzzle.  In  dusty  country,  do  not  keep 
mechanism  oily,  but  dry  and  clean. 

The  bayonet  must  be  wiped  before  returning  to  scab- 
bard, after  it  has  been  oiled  or  the  rifle  has  been  fired 
with  the  bayonet  fixed. 

Keep  ammunition  dry  and  clean  and  out  of  extreme 
temperatures. 

Misfire:  (a)  From  defective  ammunition;  try  again 
or  in  another  rifle;  (b)  from  defective  rifle;  take  rifle 
to  armorer. 

Examine  sights  and  loading  mechanism  and  ''fix''  or 
try  bayonet  before  going  into  action. 


CHAPTER  VI 

(Prepares  for  Official  Tests  VII  and  VIII) 

SIGHTING   EXERCISES 

50.    TRAJECTORY    (Fig.  4.)    The  bullet,  in  traveling 

from  the  barrel  to  the  mark,  does  not  go  in  a  straight 

line  but  in  a  curve  like  a  baseball  and  is  influenced  by — 

(i.)   Gravity  (3.)   Bullet  Drift  to  right 

(2.)   Wind  (4.)   Rifle  jump  to  left 

In  the  Model  1903,  Jump  and  Drift  are  automatically 

corrected  by  the  angle  at  which  the  drift  slide  rises  in 


14.42 

^ 

IC 

4-1 

"~-^ 

v. 

..r:::^.      .. 

^, 

^  5 

-^C^ 

••     ~      4 

96 

^^ — ,^^ 

^^ 

V 

^  ^  ^ 

\ 

\, 

u 

^ 

^,^> 

-^ 

W=^^^ 

-^-ttJ 

HH 

HH 

;^^ 

-■ 

1     ^^-^ 

fc^n^^^ 

;5 

— N 

— \ 

100  200  300  400  500  (o(^Q  jOO  800  9OO  lOOO-f^-^' 

Fig.   4. — Curves  of  Trajectories  of   Rifle   Bullets   for   Different    Ranges. 
For  Model    1903. 


In  the  Model  191 7,  there  is  no  such 


taking  elevation, 
correction. 

The  rear  sight  Elevation  is  for  counteracting  the  in- 
fluence of  gravity.     In  the  Model   1903,  the  windgauge 

23 


24  SIGHTING  EXERCISES 

is  used  to  counteract  the  influence  of  the  wind.  In  the 
Model  19 1 7,  there  is  no  windga age,  but  corrections, 
when  necessary,  are  made  by  aiming  off. 

The  bullet  describes  a  vertical  curve  which  is  con- 
stantly changing  and  becoming  more  pronounced  as  it 
approaches  the  end  of  its  flight,  due  to  the  decrease  in 
the  forward  velocity,  caused  by  the  resistance  of  the 
air,  and  the  increase  of  the  downward  velocity  caused 
by  gravity. 

Gravity  is  counteracted  by  elevating  the  line  of  the 
barrel  above  the  Line  of  Sight  enough  to  compen- 
sate for  the  distance  through  v/hich  the  bullet  will  fall. 
This  is  done  by  raising  the  slide  in  the  rear  sight. 


Fig.   5. — Line   of    Sight. 

51.  LINE  OF  SIGHT  is  the  line  of  vision  from  the 
eye,  through  the  middle  of  the  rear  sight  notch,  at  its 
top,  (or  the  center  of  the  peep),  touching  the  top  of 
the  front  sight  and  thence  continuing  to  the  mark.  (Fig. 
5.) 

52.  POINT  or  AIM.  (Figs.  6  and  6a.)  To  give  the 
greatest  uniformity,  a  point  just  below  the  mark,  and  not 
the  mark,  is  preferable  as  the  Point  of  Aim,  as  a  more 
definite  sight  can  be  taken  with  the  contrast  which  a 
line  of  light  or  different  color,  between  the  front  sight 
and  the  mark  or  bull's-eye,  gives.     As  it  is  impossible 


Fig.   6. — Normal  Sight,  Showing  Point  of  Aim 


Fig.  6a. — Peep  Sight,  Showing  Point  of  Aim. 
25 


26  SIGHTING  EXERCISES 

to  always  know,  if  touching  the  mark  with  the  top  of 
front  sight,  how  much  of  front  sight  is  seen,  the  term 
"on  the  mark  or  bull's-eye"  will  be  understood  to  mean 
an  aim,  taken:  just  below  the  mark,  showing  a  fine  line 
of  light  between  the  mark  and  the  top  of  the  front  sight. 

53.  NOEMAL  SIGHT.  The  top  of  the  front  sight 
should  be  level  with  the  top  of  the  open  rear  sight  and  in 
the  middle  of  its  notch  (Fig.  6)   for  Model  1903. 

The  corresponding  position  for  the  peep  sight  in  either 
Model  1903  or  1917  is  when  the  middle  of  the  top  of  the 
front  sight  is  in  the  center  of  the  peep  (Fig.  6a). 

Always  take  the  same  amount  of  front  sight,  as  this  is 
essential   for  good  shooting. 

To  raise  the  line  of  fire, 

either 

Increase  the  elevation  of  the  rear  sight 

or 

Aim  at  a  higher  point  on  the  target. 

The  first  method  is  much  the  better  when  possible. 
Always  put  the  top  of  the  front  sight,  not  the  bull's-eye 
or  mark,  in  the  center  of  the  peep  hole,  otherwise  the 
Normal  Sight  will  not  be  obtained  and  there  will  be  no 
uniformity  in  sighting. 

54.  BATTLE  SIGHT.  The  ^Battle  Sight  on  the 
Model  1903  Rifle  is  the  open  notch  on  top  of  the  leaf 
slide  when  the  leaf  is  down. 

In  the  Model  1917,  it  is  a  ''peep''  sight. 

This  sight  is  provided  so  that  the  soldier  will  have  a 
reasonable  mean  elevation  for  use  at  close  ranges,  when 
he  has  not  time,  or  neglects,  to  change  the  sight  eleva- 


SIGHTING  EXERCISES  27 

tion.     It  might  therefore  be  regarded  as  an  "Instinctive 
Sight/' 

55.  IMPORTANT  POINTSo     Never  cant  the  piece. 
Always  take  the  same  amount  of  front  sight,  more 

will  shoot  higher,  less  will  shoot  lower. 

Always  have  front  sight  in  the  middle  of  rear  sight; 

with  front  sight  to  the  left,  the  rifle  shoots  to  the  left; 
and  to  the  right,  it  shoots  to  the  right. 

56.  SIGHTING  APPARATUS,  (i.)  Sighting  Bar 
(See  Fig.  7).  (a)  A  bar  of  wood  about  i  by  2  inches 
by  4  feet  with  a  thin  slot  one  inch  deep  cut  across  the 
edge  about  20  inches  from  one  end; 

(b)  A  front  sight  of  tin  or  cardboard  ^X3  inches 
tacked  to  the  end  nearer  the  slot  and  projecting  i  inch 
above  bar; 

(c)  An  eye  piece  of  tin  or  cardboard  1x3  inches 
tacked  to  the  other  end  of,  and  projecting  i  inch  above, 
the  bar,  with  a  very  small  hole  (0.03  inch)  one  half  inch 
from  top  of  part  projecting  from  the  bar; 

(d)  An  open  rear  sight  of  tin  or  cardboard  15^x3 
inches,  with  a  U  shaped  notch  ^  inch  wide,  cut  in  the 
middle  of  one  of  the  long  edges.  This  is  placed  in  the 
slot  on  the  bar.  (A  slight  bend  of  the  part  of  the  tin 
fitting  in  the  slot  will  give  enough  friction  to  hold  the 
sight  in  any  part  of  slot  in  which  it  is  placed)  ; 

(e)  A  peep  rear  sight  of  tin  or  cardboard  3x3  inches, 
with  a  peep  hole  ^  inch  in  diameter  cut  in  the  center. 
This  replaces  the  open   sight,  when  the  peep  sight  is . 
used. 

Carefully  blacken  all  pieces  of  tin  and  cardboard  and 
the  top  of  the  bar.     Nail  the  bar  to  a  box  about  I  foot 


28 


SIGHTING  EXERCISES 


high  and  place  on  the  ground,  table,  or  other  suitable 
place.  Then  adjust  the  open  (or  peep)  rear  sight  in  the 
slot  and  direct  the  bar  upon  a  bulFs-eye  (preferably  an 
X  or  Y  target)  placed  about  5  yards  from  the  bar.    No 


Fig.  7. — Sighting    Bar. 


other  than  the  sight  desired  can  be  seen.  Errors,  etc., 
are  shown  by  manipulating  the  open  and  peep  rear 
sights. 

(2.)  Target  Machine  consists  of  a  mounting  for  a 
miniature  target  and  jointed  arms  on  which  a  service 
rifle  is  mounted,  such  that  moving  the  rifle  to  the  line 
of  sight  in  aiming  at  an  aiming  target  situated  some  20 


SIGHTING  EXERCISES  29 

feet  away,  moves  a  pin  in  unison  with  it,  which  points 
at  a  miniature  target  exactly  as  the  line  of  sight  on  the 
rifle  points  at  the  aiming  target.  When  the  trigger  is 
pulled,  the  miniature  target  impales  itself  upon  the  pin 
in  the  same  relative  position  as  a  bullet  would  have  hit 
the  aiming  target. 

(3.)  Aiming  Eod  Device  (Hollifield).  This  is  a  de- 
vice often  used  for  practice  in  aiming  and  trigger  squeeze 
in  both  slow  and  rapid  fire. 

It  consists  of  a  mechanical  arrangement  in  the  rifle 
and  a  miniature  target  whereby  pulling  the  trigger  of 
the  rifle  marks  the  point  of  aim  on  the  target. 

This  apparatus  has  been  officially  adopted  by  the 
United  States  Army  and  can  be  obtained  on  requisition^ 
or  can  be  purchased  direct  from  the  Hollifield  Target 
Practice  Company,  Middletown,  N.  Y. 

(4.)  Belgian  Aiming  Device,  consists  of  a  reflector 
cage  on  the  rifle  by  which  the  instructor  can  see  the  re- 
flection of  both  sights  and  the  object  aimed  at,  so  as  to 
judge  of  the  accuracy  and  steadiness  of  the  soldier's  aim. 
The  device  is  placed  just  back  of  the  rear  sight. 

57.     FIRST  SIGHTING  EXERCISE.    Sighting  Bar. 

Using  the  Sighting  Bar,  represent  the  normal  open 
sight  and  the  normal  peep  sight  and  require  each  man 
in  the  squad  to  look  at  them. 

Using  the  Sighting  Bar,  describe  and  represent  the 
usual  errors  of  sighting  and  require  each  man  in  the 
squad  to  look  at  them,  such  as 

(a.)   Front  sight  too  high  or  too  low 

(b.)   Front  sight  to  right  or  left  of  middle  of  notch 

or  peep 
(c.)   Canting 


30  SIGHTING  EXERCISES 

58.  SECOND  AND  THIED  SIGHTING  EXERCISES, 
COMBINED.     Triangle  of  sighting. 

A  soldier  acting  as  marker  is  provided  with  a  pencil 
and  a  small  rod,  bearing  a  disk  of  white  cardboard 
about  3  inches  in  diameter,  with  a  black  bull's-eye  (a 
black  paster  is  best)  placed  in  the  center  with  a  hole 
just  large  enough  to  admit  the  point  of  a  lead  pencil. 
The  soldier  sighting,  with  a  fixed  sighting  bar  or  rifle 
on  a  fixed  rest,  and  using  the  peep  sight,  directs  the 
marker  to  move  the  disk  to  the  right,  left,  higher,  lower, 
until  the  Line  of  Aim  is  established,  when  he  commands 
''Mark/'  At  the  command  ''Mark/'  being  careful  not  to 
move  the  disk,  the  marker  records  through  the  hole  in 
its  center  the  position  of  the  disk  and  then  withdraws 
it.  Then  being  careful  not  to  disturb  the  sights,  repeat 
the  operation  until  three  marks  have  been  made. 

Join  the  three  points  as  determined  as  above,  by 
straight  lines,  mark  with  the  soldier's  name,  and  call 
his  attention  to  the  triangle  thus  formed.  The  shape 
and  size  of  this  triangle  will  indicate  the  nature  and 
the  variations  made  in  aiming. 

59.  FOURTH  SIGHTING  EXERCISE.     Canting. 

This  exercise  is  a  demonstration  of  the  effect  of  cant- 
ing the  piece.  The  soldier  must  be  impressed  with  the 
necessity  of  keeping  the  sights  vertical  when  aiming, 
and  not  canting  the  piece  to  the  right  or  left.  Explain  to 
the  soldier  that  if  the  piece  is  canted  to  the  right,  the 
bullet  will  strike  to  the  right  and  below  the  point  aimed 
at,  even  though  the  rifle  be  otherwise  correctly  aimed  and 
the  sights  correctly  set.  Similarly,  if  the  piece  is  canted 
to  the  left,  the  bullet  will  strike  to  the  left  and  low.  This 
can  be  explained  by   showing  that  the   elevation  fixes 


SIGHTING  EXERCISES  31 

the  height  of  the  point  where  the  bullet  will  hit  the  tar- 
get, and  that  windage  fixes  the  point  to  the  right  or 
left;  i.  e.,  the  elevation  gives  vertical  effects  and  wind- 
age horizontal  effects.  Let  a  pencil  (or  rod)  held  verti- 
cal represent  the  elevation ;  now,  if  the  pencil  is  turned 
to  the  right  90  degrees,  or  horizontal,  all  of  the  eleva- 
tion has  been  taken  off,  causing  the  shot  to  strike  low 
and  changed  into  windage,  causing  the  shot  to  strike 
to  the  right. 

This  effect  may  be  demonstrated  as  follows :  Use  the 
sighting  rest  with  the  rifle  firmly  held  in  the  notches,  the 
bolt  removed.  Paste  a  black  paster  near  the  center  Ci 
the  bottom  line  of  the  target.  Sight  the  rifle  on  this  mark, 
using  about  1,600  yards  elevation,  then,  being  careful  not 
to  move  the  rifle,  look  through  the  bore  and  direct  the 
marker  to  move  the  disk  until  the  bull's-eye  is  in  the 
center  of  the  field  of  view  and  command  ''Mark/'  Next 
turn  the  rest  with  the  rifle  on  its  right  side,  and  with 
the  same  elevation  sight  on  the  same  paster  as  above, 
then  being  careful  not  to  move  the  rifle,  look  through 
the  bore  and  again  direct  the  marker  to  move  the  disk 
until  the  bull's-eye  is  in  the  center  of  the  field  of  view 
and  command  ''Markf'  Not  considering  the  fall  of  the 
bullet,  the  first  mark  represents  the  point  struck  with 
the  sight  vertical,  the  second  mark  represents  the  point 
struck,  low  and  to  the  right,  using  the  same  elevation 
and  the  same  point  of  aim,  when  the  piece  is  canted  90 
degrees  to  the  right. 

Different  degrees  of  canting  the  piece  can  be  repre- 
sented by  drawing  an  arc  of  a  circle  through  the  two 
marks  with  the  paster  as  a  center.  The  second  mark  will 
be  at  a  point  on  this  arc  corresponding  to  the  degrees 


32 


SIGHTING  EXERCISES 


of  canting  the  piece.  Emphasis  will  be  laid  upon  the  fact 
that  this  effect  of  canting  increases  with  the  distance 
from  the  target. 

60.  ALLOWANCE  EXERCISE.  Aiming  Down  for 
Change  of  Elevation. 

With  the  enemy  at  over  550  yards,  there  is  time  to 
alter  elevation  of  sights. 

When  raising  or  lowering  sights  in  firing  up  to  550 
yards  is  inadvisable,  in  the  field,  the  battle  sight  is  used 
and  allowance  is  made  by  aiming  down  as  follows : 

(a)  At  an  approaching  upright,  or  kneeling,  enemy, 
aim  at  his  feet. 

(b)  At  a  prone  enemy,  aim  a  full  foot  below. 
Aiming  Off  for  Wind. 

Altering  the  wind  gauge  is  not  the  usual  means  for 
allowing  for  wind  in  many  cases  in  the  field,  and  cannot 
be  done  with  Model  1917.  Against  close  formations 
neglect  windage.  When  aiming  off  for  the  wind,  re- 
member that  a  man's  breadth,  when  facing  you,  is  about 
two  feet  wide.  Make  windage  allowance  in  one  breadth, 
two  breadths,  etc.,  of  a  man,  as  in  following  rough  table: 
Bough  Table  for  Right  Angle  Winds. 


Range 

Velocity  of  Wind  in  Miles  per  Hour 

Mild,  10  Miles 

Fresh,  20  Miles 

Strong,  30  Miles 

500 

800 

1000 

1200 

2  ft. 

5  ft. 

8  ft. 

12  ft. 

4  ft. 
10  ft. 
17  ft. 
24  ft. 

6  ft. 
15  ft. 
25  ft. 
36  ft. 

SIGHTING  EXERCISES  33 

Example:  Assuming  a  range  of  800  yards  and  a  mild 
wind  of  10  miles  per  hour,  the  table  shows  that  a  bullet 
is  blown  5  feet  off  the  mark.  Therefore,  with  such  a 
wind  from  the.  left,  the  soldier  should  aim  to  the  left  5 
feet  or  2j4  ''breadths''  of  a  man  at  that  distance. 
Aiming  Off  for  Enemy  Moving  At  Right  Angles. 

(a)  Ranges  up  to  500  yards,  aim 

About  I  ft.  in  front  per  100  yds.  at  a  man  walking 
About  2  ft.  in  front  per  100  yds.  at  a  man  at  "double  time" 
About  3  ft.  in  front  per  100  yds.  at  a  horseman  trotting 
About  6  ft.  in  front  per  100  yds.  at  a  horseman  galloping 

(b)  Range  over  500  yards,  aim 

At  the  head  of  a  column  of  troops  moving  to  either 

flank. 

About  6  lengths  ahead  of  Airplanes. 
At  the  nose  of  the  envelope  of  Airships. 

Exercice  fcr  Battle  Sight  of  Model  1903.  Aiming  down 
to  counteract  Battle  Sight,  or  long  range  elevation,  for 
short  ranges : 

With  an  adjustable  rest  for  rifle,  the  ''Sighter"  is  in- 
structed to  estimate  and  sight  and  set  rifle  some  multiple, 
such  as  one-half  the  zvidth  of  hulVs-eye  below  the  bull's- 
eye.  When  done,  the  instructor  looks  through  the  sights 
and  directs  marker,  with  disk  bull's-eye,  to  ''mark"  when 
disk  is  in  normal  position  to  sights.  The  distance  thus 
measured  is  compared  and  corrected,  the  Sighter  looking 
through  the  sights  at  the  new  correct  point. 

In  the  same  way,  ''Mark''  the  estimated  aim,  once  the 
width  and  then  twice  the  zvidth  of  bull's-eye  below  mark. 

Note.  If  practice  in  "Aiming  Oft*"  is  desired,  left  and 
right  estimated  aims  can  be  taken  and  corrected  as  in 
"Aiming  Down  Exercise,"  preceding. 


CHAPTER  VII 
(Prepares  for  Official  Tests  V,  VI  and  IX) 
POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILLS 

61.  TO  LOAD.  Being  in  line  or  skirmish  line  at  halt. 
I.  With  dummy  (blank  or  bail)  cartridges,  2.  Load. 

At  the  command  load  each  trooper  faces  half  right 
and  carries  the  right  foot  to  the  right,  about  i   foot,  to 


Fig.   8. — To  !oa 
34 


POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILLS  35 

such  position  as  will  insure  the  greatest  firmness  and 
steadiness  of  the  body,  raises  or  lowers  the  rifle  and 
drops  it  into  the  left  hand  at  the  balance,  left  thumb 
extended  along  the  stock,  muzzle  at  the  height  of  the 


Fig.  9. — Position  of  "Load/ 


breast,  and,  in  Model  1903,  turns  the  cut-off  up.  With 
the  right  hand  he  turns  and  draws  the  bolt  back,  takes 
a  loaded  clip  (Fig.  8)  and  inserts  the  end  in  the  clip 
slots,  places  the  thumb  well  back  on  the  powder  space 
of  the  top  cartridge,  the  fingers  extending  around  the 
rifle  and  tips  resting  on  the  magazine  floor-plate;  forces 
the  cartridges  into  the  magazine  by  pressing  down  with 
the  thumb ;  without  removing  the  clip  thrusts  the  bolt 


36  POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILLS 

home,  turning  down  the  handle ;  turns  the  safety  lock  to 
the  "Safe'';  and  carries,  the  hand  to  the  small  of  the 
stock.     (Fig.  9.) 

A  skirmish  line  may  load  while  moving,  the  rifle 
being  held  as  nearly  as  practicable  in  the  position  of 
load. 

If  kneeling  or  sitting,  the  position  of  the  piece  is  sim- 
ilar;  if  kneeling,  the  left  forearm  rests  on  the  left  thigh; 
if  sitting,  the  elbows  are  supported  by  the  knees;  if  lying 
down,  the  left  hand  steadies  and  supports  the  piece  at 
the  balance,  the  toe  of  the  butt  resting  on  the  ground, 
the  muzzle  off  the  ground. 

For  reference,  these  positions  (standing,  kneeling  and 
lying  down)  are  designated  as  that  of  Load. 

For  instruction  in  loading:     i.  Simulate,  2.  Load. 

With  the  Model  1903,  this  is  executed  as  above  de- 
scribed, without  cartridges,  except  that  the  Cut-off  re- 
mains ''off"  and  the  handling  of  cartridges  is  simulated. 
.With  the  Model  1917,  it  can  be  executed  as  above 
described,  without  cartridges,  if  the  Follower  is  held 
down  by  the  Follower  Depressor,  issued  for  this  purpose. 

n/VGfRWTCH  ro  rAC/urATt 

CONCAVr  7VPPLAT£  f/fEMOVAL^OM MAGAZ//^£ 


w/y(PS  TO  emAGe  WE  fvuoifl^£:R> 

Fig.   9a. — Follower    Depressor    ior    Model    19 17. 

Follower  Depressor.  The  Depressor  is  to  be  used  only 
in  Exercises.     (Fig.  9a.) 

Its  object  is  to  hold  the  Follower  down  clear  of  the 
bolt. 


POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILLS  37 

The  Depressor  is  inserted  into  the  Magazine  edgewise, 
forcing  the  Magazine  Follower  down  and  is  then  turned 
laterally  into  normal  position  and  allowed  to  rise  with 
the  Follower.  The  edges  of  the  Depressor  engage  the 
sides  of  the  Magazine  opening  in  the  Receiver  and  since 
the  top  plate  of  the  Depressor  is  troughed,  sufficient 
clearance  for  the  movement  of  the  Bolt  is  afforded. 

The  recruits  are  first  taught  to  simulate  loading  and 
firing.  After  a  few  lessons  dummy  cartridges  may  be 
used.    -Later,  blank  cartridges  may  be  used. 

62.  EXERCISE— LOADING  MAGAZINE  FEOM 
BELT.  The  soldier  will  be  exercised  in  loading  from 
the  belt,  pockets  fastened,  with  a  clip  of  dummy  car- 
tridges, in  position  of  Standing,  Kneeling,  Sitting,  Prone. 

63.  TO  UNLOAD.  Take  the  Position  of  Load,  turn 
the  safety  lock  up  and  move  bolt  alternately  back  and 
forward  until  all  the  cartridges  are  ejected,  taking  care 
to  do  this  slowly  to  avoid  scattering  or  injuring  the  car- 
tridges. After  the  last  cartridge  is  ejected,  the  chamber 
is  closed  by  first  thrusting  the  bolt  slightly  forward  to 
free  it  from  the  stud  holding  it  in  place  when  the  cham- 
ber is  open,  pressing  the  follower  down  and  back  to  en- 
gage it  under  the  bolt,  and  then,  thrusting  the  bolt  home, 
the  safety  lock  is  turned  to  ready,  and  the  trigger  is 
pulled.  The  cartridges  are  then  picked  up,  cleaned  and 
returned  to  the  belt,  and  the  rifle  is  brought  to  the  order. 

The  position  of  Ready  is  the  same  as  the  Position  of 
Load  except  that  the  safety  is  turned  to  Ready. 

64.  POSITION  EXERCISE,  STANDING.  The  squad 
being  in  the  Position  of  Load,  the  instructor  commands : 
I.  Position,  2.  Exercise,     At  the  last  command,  without 


38 


POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILLS 


moving  the  body  or  eyes,  raise  the  rifle  smartly  to  the 
front  of  the  right  shoulder  to  the  full  extent  of  the 
left  arm,  elbow  inclined  downward,  the  barrel  nearly 
horizontal,  muzzle  slightly  depressed,  heel  of  the  butt 
on  a  line  with  the  top  of  the  shoulder. 


Fig.   io. — Position  of  Aiming,   Standing. 

Two.  Bring  the  piece  smartly  against  the  hollow  of 
the  shoulder,  without  permitting  the  shoulder  to  give 
way,  and  press  the  rifle  against  it,  mainly  with  the  right 
hand,  only  slightly  with  the  left,  the  forefinger  (second 
joint)  of  the  right  hand  resting  lightly  against  the  trig- 
ger, the  rifle  inclined  neither  to  the  right  nor  left.  At 
the  same  time  bring  the  left  elbow  well  under  the  rifle; 
right  elbow  as  high  as  the  shoulder.     (Fig.  lo.) 


POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILLS  39 

Three.     Resume  the  position  of  Ready, 
Remarks.     The  instructor  should  endeavor  to  give  to 
each  man  an  easy  and  natural  position 

The  butt  of  the  piece  must  be  pressed  firmly,  but  not  too 
tightly,  into  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder  and  not  against 
the  muscles  of  the  upper  arm.  If  held  too  tightly,  the 
pulsations  of  the  body  will  be  communicated  to  the  piece ; 
if  too  loosely,  the  recoil  will  bruise  the  shoulder.  If 
only  the  heel  or  toe  touches  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder, 
the  recoil  may  throw  the  muzzle  down  or  up,  affecting 
the  position  of  the  hit.  While  both  arms  are  used  to 
press  the  piece  to  the  shoulder,  the  left  arm  should  be 
used  to  direct  the  piece  and  the  right  forefinger  must 
be  left  free  to  squeeze  the  trigger. 

65.  MUSCLE  EXEECISE.  Note— Men  must  not  be 
unduly  fatigued  by  the  exercises  or  exercised  when  tired. 
First  Exercise. 

One.  Move  rifle  from  position  of  Ready  to  Aim 
(Pressing  smartly  against  the  shoulder). 

Two.     Return  to  Ready. 

Note.     Interval  between  One  and  Two,  will  be  pro- 
gressively increased  until  rifle  can  be  held  at  shoulder 
for  two  minutes  without  fatigue. 
Second  Exercise. 

One.     Bring  rifle  to  Aim. 

Two.     Drop  right  hand. 

Three.     Replace  right  hand  and  drop  left  hand. 

Note.  The  commands  Two  and  Three  should  be 
given  at  intervals  of  about  lo  seconds. 

66.  AIMING  exercise'.     The   instructor   will   first 


40  POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILLS 

direct  the  sights  to  be  adjusted  for  the  lowest  elevation, 
and  subsequently  for  the  different  longer  ranges. 

The  instructor  commands:      i.  Aiming.     2.  Exercise. 

At  the  last  command,  execute  the  first  and  second  mo- 
tion of  the  Position  Exercise.      (Par.  64.)      (Fig.   10.) 

Two.  Bend  the  head  a  little  to  the  right,  the  cheek 
resting  snugly  against  the  stock  to  assist  the  ''hold"  and 
avoid  bruising  the  jaw ;  the  left  eye  closed,  the  right  eye 
looking  through  the  rear  sight  at  a  point  slightly  below 
the  mark. 

Three.  Draw  a  moderately  long  breath,  let  a  portion 
of  it  escape,  then,  with  the  lungs  in  a  state  of  rest,  slowly 
raise  the  rifle  with  the  left  hand,  being  careful  not  to 
incline  the  sight  to  either  side,  until  the  line  of  sight  is 
directly  on  the  mark;  hold  the  rifle  steadily  directed  on 
the  mark  for  a  moment  (7  to  10  seconds)  ;  then,  with- 
out command,  and  just  before  the  power  to  hold  the 
rifle  steadily  is  lost,  drop  the  rifle  to  the  position  of 
Ready  and  resume  the  breathing. 

Remarks.  Some  riflemen  prefer  to  extend  the  left 
arm.  Such  a  position  gives  greater  control  over  the 
rifle  when  firing  in  a  strong  wind  or  at  moving  objects. 
It  also  possesses  advantages  when  a  rapid  as  well  as 
accurate  delivery  of  fire  is  desired.  Whatever  the  posi- 
tion, whether  standing,  kneeling,  sitting  or  prone,  the 
piece  should  rest  on  the  palm  of  the  left  hand,  never  on 
the  tips  of  the  fingers,  and  should  be  firmly  grasped  by 
all  the  fingers  and  the  thumb. 

Lowering  the  head  too  far  to  the  front,  to  bring  the 
eye  into  the  Line  of  Sight,  brings  it  near  the  right  hand, 
which  grasps  the  stock.  When  the  piece  is  discharged, 
this  hand  is  carried  by  the  recoil  to  the  rear  and,  when 


POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILLS  41 

the  head  is  in  this  position,  may  strike  against  the  nose 
or  mouth.  This  often  happens  in  practice,  and,  as  a  re- 
sult of  this  blow  often  repeated,  many  men  become 
gun-shy  or  flinch,  or  close  their  eye  at  the  moment  of 
firing.  Much  bad  shooting,  ascribed  to  other  causes,  is 
really  due  to  this  fault.  Raising  the  right  elbow  at 
right  angles  to  the  body  elevates  the  right  shoulder,  and 
lifts  the  piece  so  that  it  is  no  longer  necessary  to  incline 
the  head  materially  to  the  front  in  order  to  look  along 
the  sights. 

As  changes  in  the  elevation  of  the  rear  sight  will  ne- 
cessitate a  corresponding  change  in  the  position  of  the 
soldier's  head  when  aiming,  the  exercise  should  not  be 
held  with  the  sight  adjusted  for  the  longer  ranges  until 
the  men  have  been  practiced  with  the  sights  as  they 
would  generally  be  adjusted  for  off  hand  firing. 

The  soldier  must  be  cautioned  that,  while  raising 
the  line  of  sight  to  the  mark,  he  must  fix  his  eye  on  the 
mark  and  not  on  the  front  sight.  If  this  plan  be  not  fol- 
lowed, when  firing  is  held  on  the  range  at  long  distances 
the  mark  will  generally  appear  blurred  and  indistinct. 

The  rifle  must  be  raised  slowly,  without  jerk,  and  its 
motion  stopped  gradually.  In  retaining  it  directed  at  the 
mark,  care  must  be  taken  not  to  continue  the  aim  after 
steadiness  is  lost;  this  period  will  probably  be  found  to 
be  short  at  first,  but  will  quickly  lengthen  with  practice. 
No  effort  should  be  made  to  prolong  it  beyond  the  time 
that-  breathing  can  be  easily  restrained.  Each  soldier 
will  determine  for  himself  the  proper  time  for  dismount- 
ing the  aim. 

67.  TRIGGER  SQUEEZE  EXERCISE.  The  trigger 
should  be  squeezed,  not  pulled,  the  hand  being  closed 


42  POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILLS 

upon  itself  as  a  sponge  is  squeezed,  the  forefinger  shar- 
ing in  this  movement.  The  forefinger  should  be  placed 
as  far  around  the  trigger  as  to  press  it  with  the  second 
joint.  By  practice  the  soldier  becomes  familiar  with  the 
trigger  squeeze  of  his  rifle,  and  knowing  this,  he  is  able 
to  judge  at  any  time,  within  limits,  what  additional  pres- 
sure is  required  for  its  discharge.  By  constant  repeti- 
tion of  this  exercise  he  should  be  able  finally  to  squeeze 
the  trigger  to  a  certain  point  beyond  which  the  slightest  , 
movement  will  release  the  sear.  Having  squeezed  the 
trigger  to  this  point,  the  aim  is  corrected  and  the  addi- 
tional pressure  is  applied  and  the  discharge  follows. 

Exercise.  The  instructor  commands:  i.  Trigger 
Squeeze.  2.  Exercise.  At  the  command  Exercise,  the 
soldier  will  execute  the  first  motion  of  the  Aiming  Ex- 
ercise.    (Par.  66.) 

Two.     The  second  motion  of  the  Aiming  Exercise. 

Three.  Draw  a  moderately  long  breath,  let  a  por- 
tion of  it  escape,  hold  the  breath  and  slowly  raise  the 
rifle  with  the  left  hand,  until  the  line  of  sight  is  on  the 
mark,  being  careful  not  to  incline  the  sights  to  either  side. 
Contract  the  trigger  finger  gradually,  slozvly  and  stead- 
ily, increasing  the  pressure  on  the  trigger  while  the  aim 
is  being  perfected.  In  most  trigger  pulls  there  are  two 
distinct  stages:  i.  The  Slack;  2.  The  Creep  or  Drag 
ending  at  the  Critical  Point.  After  the  slack  is  taken 
out  and  the  creep  begins,  continue  the  gradual  increase 
of  pressure  required  to  release  the  point  of  the  ^ear 
which  should  be  done  almost  insensibly,  the  pull  sliding 
along  through  the  creep  without  causing  any  deflection 
of  the  rifle.  After  one  has  shot  a  rifle  a  few  times,  he 
will  get  to  know  how  long  the  creep  is,  and  so,  when 


POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILLS  43 

the  critical  point  is  approaching.  This  will  enable  him 
to  make  the  release  of  the  firing  pin  and  the  perfection 
of  the  aim  take  place  at  the  same  time,  which  is  impor- 
tant in  firing  in  a  heavy  side  wind  or  at  a  movable 
mark,  where  the  aim  cannot  be  held  steadily.  Continue 
the  aim  for  a  moment  after  release  of  the  firing  pin, 
and  observe  if  any  change  has  been  made  in  the  direc- 
tion of  the  line  of  sight  to  note  errors  of  sight  due  to 
pulling  or  flinching. 

Remarks.  By  frequent  practice  in  this  exercise,  each 
man  may  come  to  know  the  exact  instant  his  firing  pin 
will  be  released.  He  must  be  taught  to  hold  the  breath, 
bring  the  sights  to  bear  upon  the  mark,  and  squeeze  the 
trigger  all  at  the  same  time. 

A  good  test  of  proper  trigger  squeezing  is  to  balance 
a  coin  on  the  hood  of  the  front  sight  while  squeezing  the 
trigger. 

68.  RAPID  FIRE  EXERCISE.  (To  be  done  with 
Model  1903  with  cut-off  *'off" ;  and  may  be  done  with 
Model  1917  with  the  Follower  held  down  by  means  of 
the  Follozver  Depressor  issued  for  this  purpose.)  It  is 
recommended  that  this  exercise  be  given  with  the  bayo- 
nets fixed  (by  the  command:  Fix  Bayonet)  as,  in  the 
field,  the  soldier  must  usually  be  ready  to  use  the  bayonet 
immediately  after  firing. 

Object.  The  object  of  this  exercise  is  to  teach  the 
soldier  to  load  and  aim  quickly  and  at  the  same  time 
accurately  in  all  the  positions  he  will  be  called  upon  to 
assume  in  range  practice.  This  may  be  done  with  the 
"Aimmg  Rod  Device"  (Hollifield)  or  the  Belgian  Aim- 
ing Device. 

The  instructor  commands:     i.  Rapid-fire  Exercise;  2. 


44  POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILLS 

Commence  firing.  At  the  first  command,  the  first  and 
second  motions  of  the  Trigger-Squeeze  Exercise  are 
performed.  At  the  second  command,  the  soldier  per- 
forms the  third  motion  of  the  Trigger-Squeeze  Exercise, 
squeezing  the  trigger  without  destroying  the  aim  or  the 
position  of  the  piece,  but  at  the  same  time  without  un- 
due deliberation.  He  then,  if  possible  without  removing 
the  rifle  from  the  shoulder,  holding  the  piece  in  position 
with  the  left  hand,  grasps  the  handle  of  the  bolt  with 
the  right  hand,  rapidly  draws  back  the  bolt,  closes  the 
chamber,  aims,  and  again  squeezes  the  trigger.  This 
movement  is  repeated  until  the  trigger  has  been  squeezed 
five  times,  when,  without  command,  the  piece  is  brought 
back  to  the  position  of  Ready. 

When  the  soldier  has  acquired  some  facility  in  this 
exercise,  he  will  be  required  to  repeat  the  movement  ten 
times,  and  finally,  by  using  dummy  cartridges,  he  may, 
by  degrees,  gain  the  necessary  quickness  and  dexterity 
for  the  execution  of  the  Rapid  Fire  required  in  range 
firing. 

Manipulation  of  the  Breech  Mechanism.  To  hold  the 
piece  to  the  shoulder,  and  at  the  same  time  manipulate 
the  breech  mechanism  with  the  proper  facility,  are 
learned  only  after  much  practice.  Some  riflemen,  es- 
pecially men  who  shoot  from  the  left  shoulder,  find  it 
easier,  in  rapid  firing,  to  drop  the  piece  to  the  position 
of  load  after  each  shot.  While  at  first  trial  this  method 
may  seem  easier,  it  is  believed,  that,  with  practice,  the 
advantage  of  the  former  method  will  be  apparent. 

Note.  Some  of  the  best  shots  in  the  United  States, 
instead  of  letting  go  of  the  bolt  handle  to  grasp  the  small 
of  the  stock,  and  pull  the  trigger  with  the  first  finger, 


POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILLS  45 

retain  their  hold  on  the  bolt  handle  with  their  thumb 
and  first  finger,  pressing  the  trigger  with  the  second 
finger.  In  this  method  the  hand  grasps  the  bolt  handle 
at  all  times  with  great  firmness,  second  finger  extended. 
The  trigger  finger  presses  the  trigger  with  the  same 
caution  and  deliberation.  (The  equivalent  of  the 
Sqiicc::e  is  obtained  by  using  the  grip  of  the  thumb  and 
first  finger  on  the  bolt  as  a  fulcrum,  instead  of  the  thumb 
over  the  small  of  the  stock.)  In  this  method  much  time 
is  saved  and  steadiness  gained  by  not  changing  the  grip 
of  the  bolt  handle  to  the  small  of  the  stock,  each  time 
the  trigger  is  pulled. 

In  all  magazine  fire,  rapidity  combined  with  accuracy 
is  best  secured  by  extreme  quickness  in  operating  the 
bolt  mechanism  and  ample  deliberation  in  aiming  and 
pressing  the  trigger. 

69.  POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILL,  KNEELING. 
These  exercises  will  be  repeated  in  the  kneeling  position 
by  causing  the  squad  to  kneel  by  the  command,  Kneel. 
(Fig.  II.)  The  exercise  will  be  executed  as  prescribed 
for  "Standing,"  except  that  at  the  command  Two  in  the 
Position  Exercise  the  soldier  will  rest  the  left  elbow 
on  the  left  knee,  the  point  of  the  elbow  in  front  of  the 
knee-cap.  The  paster  (bull's-eyes)  for  the  Kneeling 
Exerci'se  should  be  at  2^  feet  from  the  ground. 

Remarks.  Frequent  rests  will  be  given  during  prac- 
tice in  these  exercises  kneeling,  as  the  position,  if  long 
continued,  becomes  constrained  and  fatigues  the  soldier 
unnecessarily. 

In  raising  the  rifle  to  the  mark  in  the  second  and  third 
exercises,  the  position  of  the  left  hand  should  not  be 
changed,  but  the  left  forearm  should  be  brought  toward 


46  POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILLS 

the  body  and  at  the  same  time  the  body  bent  slightly  to 
the  rear. 

When  aiming  kneeling,  there  is,  from  the  nature  of  the 
position,  a  tendency  to  press  the  butt  of  the  rifle  against 
the  upper  arm  instead  of  against  the  hollow  of  the 
shoulder;  this  will  necessitate  inclining  the  head  con- 
siderably to  the  right  to  get  the  line  of  sight,  and  by 


Fig.    II. — Position  of  Aiming,  Kneeling. 

bringing  the  rifle  so  far  to  the  rear  will,  if  the  thumb 
is  placed  across  the  stock,  cause  it  to  give  by  the  recoil 
a  blow  upon  the  nose  or  mouth.  To  avoid  this,  the 
thumb  can  be  placed  along  the  top  of  the  stock,  on  the 
right  of  the  receiver. 

These  difficulties  may  be  avoided  by  advancing  the 
right  elbow  well  to  the  front,  at  the  same  time  raising  it 
so  that  the  arm  is  about  parallel  with  the  ground.  The 
hollow  of  the  shoulder  will  then  be  the  natural  place  for 
the  rifle  butt,  and  the  right  thumb  will  be  brought  too 
far  from  the  face  to  strike  it  in  the  recoil. 

Some  riflemen  prefer,  by  bending  the  ankle,  to  rest 


POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILLS  47 

the  instep  flat  on  the  ground,  the  weight  of  the  body 
coming  more  on  the  upper  part  of  the  heel ;  this  obviates 
any  tendency  of  the  right  knee  to  slip;  or  by  resting  the 
right  side  of  the  foot  on  the  ground,  toe  pointing  to  the 
front,  to  bring  the  weight  of  the  body  on  the  left  side 
of  the  foot.     These  positions  are  authorized. 

Choice  of  Position.  In  firing  kneeling,  the  steadiness 
obtained  depends  greatly  upon  the  position  adopted. 
The  peculiarities  of  the  conformation  of  the  individual 
soldier  exert,  when  firing  kneeling,  a  greater  influence 
than  when  firing  standing,  sitting  or  prone.  The  in- 
structor should,  therefore,  carefully  endeavor,  noticing 
the  build  of  each  soldier,  to  place  him  in  the  position 
for  -which  he  is  best  adapted  and  which  will  exert  the 
least  tension  or  strain  upon  the  muscles  or  nerves.  It 
should  be  remembered,  however,  that  without  the  rest 
of  the  left  elbow  on  the  knee,  forward  of  the  knee  cap, 
this  position  possesses  no  advantage  of  steadiness  over 
the  standing  position. 

Kneeling:  Position;  When  Taken.  The  kneeling  posi- 
tion can  be  taken  more  easily  than  the  sitting  or  the 
prone  position.  It  is,  therefore,  the  position  naturally 
assumed  when  a  soldier,  who  is  standing  or  advancing, 
has  to  make  a  quick  shot  at  a  moving  or  disappearing 
object  and  desires  more  steadiness  than  can  be  obtained 
standing. 

70.  POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILL,  SITTING 
DOWN.  In  many  cases  the  men,  while  able  to  kneel  and 
hold  the  piece  moderately  steady,  can  obtain  in  a  sitting 
position  much  better  results. 

To  practice  the  soldier  in  the  preceding  exercises  in  a 
sitting  position  the  squad  being  formed  in  a  single  rank, 


48  POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILLS 

with  an  interval  of  one  pace  between  files,  the  rifle 
should  first  be  brought  to  Order  arms;  the  instructor 
then  commands :    Sit  down. 

At  this  command  make  a  half  face  to  the  right  and, 
assisted  by  the  left  hand  on  the  ground,  sit  down,  facing 
slightly  to  the  right,  the  left  leg  directed  toward  the 
front,  right  leg  inclined  toward  the  right,  both  heels, 
but  not  necessarily  the  bottoms  of  the  feet,  on  the  ground, 
the  right  knee  slightly  higher  than  the  left;  body  erect 
and  carried  naturally  from  the  hips;  at  the  same  time 
drop  the  muzzle  of  the  piece  to  the  front,  and  to  the 
position  of  the  first  motion  of  load,  right  hand  upon  the 
thigh,  just  in  front  of  the  body,  the  left  hand  slightly 
above,  but  not  resting  upon,  the  left  leg. 

The  exercise  will  be  executed  as  heretofore  prescribed, 
except  that  at  the  command  Two  (Position  Exercise), 
the  soldier  will  rest  the  left  elbow  on  the  left  knee,  the 
point  of  the  elbow  in  front  of  the  knee  cap  and  the  right 
elbow  against  the  left  (or  inside)  of  the  right  knee,  at 
the  same  time  incHning  the  body  from  the  hips  slightly 
forward. 

For  the  Aiming  and  Trigger-Squeeze  Exercises,  the 
pasters,  used  as  aiming  points,  will  be  2j4  feet  from 
the  floor  or  the  ground. 

To  afford  the  men  rest,  or,  on  the  completion  of  the 
Kneeling  or  Sitting  Down  Exercises,  the  instructor  will 
command  Rise,  when  the  men  rise,  face  to  the  front, 
and  resume  the  Order  arms. 

71.  POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILL,  PRONE.  From 
the  nature  of  the  position,  it  is  not  practicable  to  exe- 
cute these  exercises  according  to  the  method  followed 
when  standing  or  kneeling.     Instruction  will,  however, 


POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILLS  49 

always  be  given  with  reference  to  the  position,  to  the 
manner  of  assuming  it,  and  to  aiming  and  squeezing 
the  trigger. 

For  this  purpose  the  squad  being  forrned  as  specified 
"Sitting  Down''  (the  black  pasters  therein  mentioned  be- 
ing about  12  inches  from  the  ground),  the  squad  will 
be  brought  to  Order  arms.  Then  (the  squad  either 
standing  or  kneeling)    the  instructor   commands :     Lie 


Fig.    12. — Position   of  Aiming,   Prone. 

Down,  which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  Drill 
Regulations;  except  that  the  body  should  be  inclined 
as  little  as  possible  and  the  toes  turned  out  with  heels 
close  to  the  ground  to  diminish  vulnerability.     (Fig.  12.) 

Note.  When  lying  down  in  action  in  the  open,  keep 
the  face  on  the  ground. 

Move  as  little  as  possible  in  any  position. 

Remain  absolutely  immovable,  when  halting  in  "At- 
tack," except  when  acting  as  "Observer"  or  firing. 

An  immovable  object  is  extremely  difficult  to  see, 
while  the  slightest  movement  immediately  attracts  the 
eye. 

Being  at  Ready,  the  instructor  then  commands:  i. 
Trigger-Squeeze,  2,  Exercise. 


50  POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILLS 

At  the  latter  command,  carry  the  left  elbow  to  the 
front  and  slightly  to  the  right,  the  left  hand  under  the 
barrel  at  the  balance,  weight  of  the  body  mainly  sup- 
ported by  the  left  elbow,  the  right  resting  lightly  on  the 
ground. 

Two.  Slide  the  rifle,  with  the  right '  hand,  through 
the  left  hand  to  the  front,  until  the  left  hand  is  a  little 
in  front  of  the  trigger  guard;  at  the  same  time  raise 
the  rifle  with  both  hands  and  press  it  against  the  hollow 
of  the  shoulder. 

Three.  Direct  the  rifle  upon  the  mark  and  carry  out 
the  further  details  of  aiming  and  squeezing  the  trigger 
as  prescribed  in  "Trigger-Squeeze  Exercise." 

Then  resume  the  position,  Lying  Dozvn,  with  the  face 
close  to  the  ground. 

As  soon  as  the  men  have  acquired  with  accuracy  the 
details  of  the  position  they  will  be  practiced,  without 
the  numbers,  in  aiming  and  squeezing  the  trigger  at  will ; 
after  which  the  rapid-fire  exercise  in  the  prone  position 
will  be  practiced,  the  necessary  skill  and  dexterity  being 
acquired  by  degrees. 

To  afford  the  men  rest,  or  on  completion  of  the  ex- 
ercise, the  instructor  will  command :    Rise. 

In  the  prone  position,  when  aiming,  the  left  elbow 
should  be  well  under  the  barrel,  the  other  elbow  some- 
what to  the  right,  but  not  so  far  as  to  induce  any  tend- 
ency to  slip  on  the  ground.     (Fig.  12.) 

The  greater  changes  in  elevation  required  in  first  di- 
recting the  rifle  on  the  object,  should  be  given  by  alter- 
ing the  position  of  the  left  hand  under  the  barrel,  the 
slightest  changes  only  by  advancing  or  withdrawing  the 
shoulder. 


POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILLS 


51 


72.     :POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILL  FROM  COVER. 

(Fig.  13.)  Instruct  the  soldier  to  assume  the  firing 
position  for  an  under-rifle-rest,  such  as  sand  bags,  para- 
pet or  wall. 


?    <? 


F         T3.     AiminjT    from    Cover. 


Also  from  a  side-rifle-rest,  such  as  a  tree,  vertical  edge 
of  wall,  door,  window,  etc. 


CHAPTER  VIII 

DEFLECTION  AND  ELEVATION  CORREC- 
TION DRILLS 

73.  ELEVATION.  With  the  Rear  Sight  Leaf  down, 
the  Battle  Sight  of  Model  1903  rifle  is  a  notch  and  has  a 
fixed  elevation  of  547  yards.  The  Battle  Sight  of  the 
Model  1917  rifle  is  a  ''peep"  and  has  a  fixed  elevation  of 
200  yards.  This  sight  is  used  when  time  is  so  important 
there  is  no  opportunity  to  set  the  sights.  The  Drift 
Slide  must  be  dropped  to  the  bottom  of  the  Sight  Leaf 
when  the  Battle  Sight  of  Model  1903  is  used. 

In  Model  1903,  with  the  Leaf  up,  the  movable  Slide 
contains  sight  openings,  the  peep  hole,  open  triangle  or 
field  view,  and  the  upper  notch  in  the  upper  edge  of  the 
Drift  Slide.  To  set  an  elevation,  loosen  the  SHde  Bind- 
ing Screw  and  bring  the  line  passing  through  the  cen- 
ter of  the  sight  opening  in  a  line  with  the  line  on  the 
side  of  the  Leaf  under  the  number  indicating  the  range 
desired,  then  tighten  the  Slide  Binding  Screw.  The 
numbers  stand  for  hundreds  of  yards, — for  example,  8 
stands  for  800  yards.  Between  these  long  lines  are 
some  shorter  ones  which  divide  the  100-yard  division 
into  50  and  25  yards. 

In  Model  1917,  with  the  Leaf  up,  the  movable  Slide 

52 


DEFLECTION  AND  ELEVATION  CORRECTION     53 

contains  a  "peep"  only.  To  set  an  elevation,  release 
the  Spring  Latch,  bring  one  of  the  lines  in  the 
beveled  opening  near  the  top  of  the  Slide  even 
with  the  line  on  the  Leaf  opposite  the  number  indicating 
the  range  desired,  release  the  Spring  Latch  into  the 
corresponding  notch  of  the  Leaf.  The  numbers  stand 
for  hundreds  of  yards  and  there  are  no  smaller  divisions 
or  intermediate  notches. 

,74.  WINDAGE.  (For  Model  1903  only,  as  the 
Model  19 1 7  has  no  wind  gauge.)  The  movable  base  is 
a  wind  gauge  moved  by  a  screw  and  graduated  toward 
the  butt  end  with  the  main  and  sub-divisions  between 
zeros  at  both  ends  of  the  scale.  Each  of  the  small  divi- 
sions is  called  a  "Point." 

Moving  the  scale  to  the  right,  past  the  right  line  on 
the  fixed  base,  is  called  taking  right  zmnd  and  is  to 
counteract  the  effect  of  a  wind  from  the  right.  Mov- 
ing the  scale  to  the  left  passing  the  left  line  on  the  fixed 
base  is  taking  left  wind.  One  small  division  is  one  point 
of  "left  wind";  two  small  divisions,  two,  etc.  In  other 
words,  to  counteract  the  effect  of  wind,  move  the  wind 
gauge  to  windward. 

Note.  The  long  lines  which  mark  every  third  point  on 
wind  gauge  are  only  to  assist  in  counting  the  number  of 
points  taken.  The  soldier  should  be  practiced  in  sight 
setting  for  designated  distance  and  windage.  Rapidity 
as  well  as  accuracy  is  important.  .The  soldier  should 
eventually  be  able  to  adjust  correctly  for  given  eleva- 
tion and  windage  in  five  seconds. 

75.  RULE  FOE  ELEVATION.  A  convenient  rule  for 
estimating  number  of  inches  up  or  down  on  the  target 


54     DEFLECTION  AND  ELEVATION  CORRECTION 

that  a  25-yard  change  in  elevation  will  change  the  posi- 
tion of  the  next  shot  is : 

Number  of  hundreds  of  yards  of  range  squared  and 
divided  by  4.     (Figs.  14,  15,  16,  17.) 


COR-tECJlOH 
COLLtJfOmU  JO  A 
akUlOf  tlEVAJlOH 
Of   50  Y'P/,- 
Of  ZJ  YV. 


LtfCJIOH    COHILf/fONDIH^  JO 
OKE   fOUJ  Of  .PCfUCJIOH  • 

Fig.    14.— Target  A— 4  ft.  x  6  ft. 
Range   200   yards. 


Example.  At  600-yard  range,  6  squared  equals  ^6, 
divided  by  4  equals  9,  or  the  number  of  inches  that  a 
change  of  25  yards'  elevation  will  raise  or  lower  the  shot 
on  the  target.  11; 


DEFLECTION  AND  ELEVATION  CORRECTION     55 


76.  RULE  FOR  WINDAGE.  ( For  Model  1903  only. ) 
A  convenient  rule  for  estimating  the  necessary  J4  points 
of  windage  for  a  first  shot  is : 

X 


COfLfLtCJlOH 
COttt/fOHPIH-S  p  A 
CRAH(JC  or  tUYATlOH 
0f_50  TfAU/j. 


0  I  2  POIHTJ" 

COlflECTlOM    COILiLE/pOHPIHf  "fa 
OHt  fOlHf  Of   DCfLECJIOH    • 

Fig.  15. — Target  A,   Range  300  yards. 


Range  in  hundreds  of  yards  multiplied  by  the  estimated 
velocity  in  miles  per  hour  divided  by  ten.  This  is  for  9 
and  3  o'clock  v^inds. 


56     DEFLECTION  AND  ELEVATION   CORRECTION 


Example.  At  600-yard  range,  wind  10  miles  per  hour, 
6x  10  equals  60;  divided  by  10  equals  6  quarter  points 
of  wind  or  one  and  one-half  points  of  left  windage  for 
a  9  o'clock  wind,  or  right  windage  for  a  3  o'clock  wind. 

Winds  from  2,  4,  8  and  10  o'clock  require  very  little  less 


125 
100 
75 

!J_>-c(5tiLeqioM 

T ~|^      COILiLE/pOHDI«(r  ]0  K 
^.CUH<iC  Of  ELEVAIIOH 
^^    0[  25  X^^  ' 
50 

H75 

100 

125 

0  h  I  ijrfoiHJ/ 

COliLtCTIOH   COtR-E/fONPIH^  |0 
!Jl  A  fOlHf   Of   PEflECJlOR 


Fig. 


16.— Target  B- 
Range  500 


-6  ft. 
yards. 


6  ft. 


windage  than  the  above.     Winds  from  ii,  I,  5  and  7 
o'clock  require  one-half  the  above  amount. 

The  taking  of  yi  point  of  wind  results  in  moving  the 
line  of  fire  laterally  upon  the  target  one  inch  for  each 
100  yards  of  range. 


DEFLECTION  AND  ELEVATION   CORRECTION     57 
Example. 

y^  point  at  200  yds.  moves  bullet  2  inches,  or  i  point,  8  inches 

(Fig.  14)    "^  ^  .     ^  .  .     , 

J4  point  at  300  yds.  moves  bullet  3  mches,  or  i  pomt,  12  mches 

(Fig.  15)  ^  ,  .  .     , 

y^  point  at  500  yds.  moves  bullet  5  inches,  or  i  pomt,  20  mches 

(Fig.  16)  ... 

%  point  at  600  yds.  moves  bullet  6  inches,  or  i  pomt,  24  mches 

(Fig.  17) 

RememlDer:     If  you  hit  below  the  mark  raise  the  Ele- 
vation Slide;  if  you  hit  to  the  right  of  the  mark,  move 


COtLEjjoilDlKt  fO  > 
CRAN(C  Of  CLCVAJION 
25     Of   25  YLp/* 


•A\        0  % 

'CotttcjioH  coitt/foniHf  JO 

out    fOlHJ  Of   UfLECJIOH  • 
Fig.    17. — Target  B.     Range  600  yards. 


58     DEFLECTION  AND  ELEVATION  CORRECTION 

the  windage  to  the  left  or  aim  to  the  left  of  the  mark; 
and  vice  versa. 

77.  BLACKING  SIGHTS.  The  sights  should  be 
black.  If  bright  they  should  be  taken  to  the  armorer 
for  blacking. 

78.  ADJUSTING  THE  SIGHTS,     (a)  Elevation.    The 

graduations  of  the  rear  sight  are  often  incorrect  and 
the  elevation  often  varies  with  conditions.  The  correc- 
tion necessary  for  each  particular  rifle  at  any  range  is 
found  by  shooting  it  at  that  range,  and  is  constant  with 
the  same  ammunition,  when  firing  under  the  same  condi- 
tions. If  no  correction  is  necessary,  the  rifle  is  said  to 
"Shoot  on  the  mark.'' 

(b)  The  Zero  of  a  Rifie.  (For  Model  1903  only.) 
That  reading  of  the  wind  gauge  necessary  to  overcome 
the  drift  of  a  rifle  at  a  particular  range  is  called  the 
"Zero''  of  that  rifle  for  that  range,  and  all  allowances 
for  wind  should  be  calculated  from  this  reading. 

The  "Zero"  of  a  rifle  should  be  found  while  shooting 
it  on  a  perfectly  calm  day. 

79.  EXERCISE.  To  give  the  soldier  practice  in  cor- 
recting elevation  and  windage,  a  target  should  be  placed 
on  the  wall  facing  the  squad  and  a  black  paster  attached 
a  foot  or  more  from  the  bull's-eye,  then  on  a  horizontal 
line  with  it,  and  finally  in  an  oblique  direction. 

For  this  drill,  the  rifle  of  each  soldier  who  has  not 
determined  by  actual  firing  the  "Zero"  and  the  correct 
elevations  for  the  different  ranges  will  be  assumed  to 
shoot  on  the  mark  and  to  require  no  windage. 

Announce  the  range  and  tell  the  men  that  the  paster 
represents  the  position  of  an  assumed  hit  and  require 


DEFLECTION  AND  ELEVATION  CORRECTION    59 

each  man  to  correct  his  sight  so  as  to  bring  the  next  hit 
into  the  bull's-eye.  This  exercise  should  be  repeated 
daily  during  Gallery  Practice,  until  the  men  have  ac- 


10 


9 


11 


8 


7  5 

6 

Fig.    1 8. — Imaginary   Horizontal   Clock   Face. 

quired  accuracy  in  making  corrections  for  all  ranges  up 
to  I, GOO  Yards. 

When  the  men  have  learned  how  to  adjust  their  sights, 


6o       DEFLECTION  AND  ELEVATION  CORRECTION 

this  exercise  should  be  carried  on  in  connection  with 
Gallery  Practice.  The  rear  sight  on  each  rifle  is  given 
an  incorrect  setting  in  elevation  and  windage  by  the  in- 
structor, and  the  soldier  required  to  find  the  correct 
adjustment  by  firing. 

The  Effect  of  Wind.  Is  is  important  that  the  sol- 
dier should  be  taught  to  estimate  the  force  and  direc- 
tion of  the  wind. 

The  direction  of  the  wind,  for  convenience,  is  ex- 
pressed by  a  clock-face  notation  (Fig.  i8),  the  clock  be- 
ing supposed  to  lie  on  the  ground  with  the  hour  XII 
toward  the  target  or  mark  and  the  hour  III  at  the  firer's 
right  hand.  A  wind  blowing  from  the  front  (that  is, 
from  the  direction  of  the  target)  is  called  a  *'XII 
o'clock  wind,"  one  directly  from  the  left  and  across  the 
field  of  fire  is  called  a  ''IX  o'clock  wind,"  and  so  on. 
The  direction  of  the  wind  can  be  obtained  by  observing 
its  effect  upon  smoke,  on  trees,  or  grass  or  dust,  or  by 
wetting  the  finger  and  holding  it  up. 

The  force  of  the  wind  is  designated  in  miles  per  hour. 


CHAPTER  IX 

OFFICIAL  TESTS  AND  KNOWN  DISTANCE 
FIRING  OF  C.  SPECIAL  COURSE 

^'The  soldier  is  first  given  a  thorough  course  of  pre- 
liminary practice  (as  outlined  in  Chapters  I  to  VIII,  in- 
vlusive).  He  is  then,  before  being  allozved  to  Hre  a 
shot  on  the  target  range,  given  the  follozvin'g  tests:'' 

80.  TEST  I.     NOMENCLATURE  OF  THE  RIFLE  in 

so  far  as  is  necessary  for  its  efficient  care  and  use. 

81.  TEST  II.  ASSEMBLING  AND  DISSEMBLING 
OF  THE  RIFLE  in  so  far  as  is  necessary  for  its  efficient 
care  and  use. 

82.  TEST  III.     CARE  OF  RIFLE. 

83.  TEST  IV.  SIGHTING-SETTING:  NORMAL  AND 
PEEP,  with  and  without  deflection.  Maximum  time 
limit  of  lo  seconds  in  each  of  not  less  than  5  consecutive 
trials. 

84.  TEST  V.     FIRING  POSITIONS: 

(a)  Standing, 

(b)  Kneeling, 

(c)  Sitting, 

(d)  Prone, 

61 


62       OFFICIAL  TESTS  OF  C.  SPECIAL  COURSE 

(e)  From  parapet,  wall  top,  or  other  under- 

rifle  rest, 

(f)  From  vertical  edge  of  wall,  door,  window, 

tree  or  similar  position. 

85.     TEST  VI.     LOADING  FROM  BELT,  pockets  fast- 
ened, with  a  clip  of  dummy  cartridges  in  position 
Standing 


Kneeling 

Sitting 

Prone 


Maximum  time  limit  of  lo  sec- 
onds each  in  best  5  out  of  7 
consecutive  trials. 


Normal  Sight 
Peep  Sight 


86.  TEST  yil.     SIGHTING.     With  rifle  in  sighting 
rest  (Third  Sighting  Exercise,  Chap.  VI). 

''  Proficiency  required  in  3  con- 
secutive triangles  of  sighting 
with  each.  Distance  20  feet ;  no 
side  of  triangle  to  exceed  Yi 
inch. 

87.  TEST  VIII.     AIMING  COMBINED  WITH  TRIG- 
GER SaUEEZE.     Test  by  means  of : 

(a)  Target  Machine, 

(b)  Aiming  Rod  Device, 

(c)  Belgian  Aiming  Device,  or 

(d)  Perforated  Bull's-eye  over  instructor's  eye. 
(Methods  used,  to  be  noted  by  abbreviations  M,  R,  B, 

and  P,  respectively.) 

(a)  Standing, 

(b)  Kneeling, 
{z\  Sitting,  and 
(d)   Prone. 

88.  TEST    IX.     RAPID    LOADING,    AIMING    AND 


OFFICIAL  TESTS  OF  C.  SPECIAL  COURSE       63 

FIRING.     Load  from  belt  and  simulate  fire  with  two 
clips  of  dummy  cartridges.     Tested  by  means  of 

(a)  Aiming  Rod  Device,  or 

(b)  Belgian  Aiming  Device,  or 

(c)  Perforated  Bull's-eye  over  instructor's  eye. 
(Methods  used  to  be  denoted  by  abbreviations  R,  B, 

and  P,  respectively.) 
In  positions : 

Standing, 

Kneeling, 

Sitting,  and 

Prone. 
Time  of  each: 

I  minute, 

I  minute,  10  seconds, 

I  minute,  10  seconds,  and 

I  minute,  20  seconds,  respectively. 

89.  TESTX.  FLINCHING.  In  prone  position.  The 
rifle  will  be  so  manipulated  by  the  instructor  that  the 
man  under  test  does  not  know  whether  or  not  it  is  loaded. 
Service  ammunition  to  be  used. 

90.  KNOWN  DISTANCE  PRACTICE,  AMMUNITION 
ALLOWANCE.  An  annual  allowance  of  150  rounds  per 
man  is  authorized  for  Known  Distance  Practice,  which 
includes  Short  Range  Practice,  Midrange  Practice  and 
Practice  with  Telescopic  Sights. 

91.  SHORT  RANGE  PRACTICE   CONDITIONS.     All 

firing  from  a  typical  trench,  bayonet  fixed  except  as  noted, 
rifle  resting  on  parapet. 

92.  INSTRUCTION  PRACTICE, 


64       OFFICIAL  TESTS  OF  C.  SPECIAL  COURSE 

TABLE    I. — SLOW  FIRE. 


Range, 
Yards 

Time 

Shots 

Target 

Position 
and  Type 
of  Trench 

Sight 

lOO 
200 

300* 

No  limit 
No  limit 

No  limit 

10 
10 

15 

A-4 
A-4 

A-4 

(Fig.  14) 

Prone 
Standing 

Standing 

Leaf 
5  Leaf  and 
5  Battle  sight 
10  Leaf  and 
5  Battle  sight 

^  One-half  of  firing  with  leaf  sight  at  this  range  will 
be  with  bayonet  not  fixed. 

105  points  out  of  possible  175  in  Slow  Fire  at  bull's- 
eye  target  necessary  to  advance  to  Slow  Fire  at  figure 
target. 

TABLE   2. — SLOW  FIRE. 


Range, 
Yards 

Time 

Shots 

Target 

Position 
and  Type 
of  Trench 

Sight 

100 
200 
300 

No  limit 
No  limit 
No  limit 

5 

5 
5 

Head 
F 
F 

(Figs.  19 
and  19a) 

Prone 

Standing 

Standing 

Leaf 
Leaf 
Leaf 

9  hits  out  of  possible  15  required  to  advance  to  Rapid 
Fire. 


OFFICIAL  TESTS  OF  C.  SPECIAL  COURSE       65 

TABLE  3. — RAPID   FIRE. 


Range, 

Yards 

Time 

Shots 

Target 

Position 
and  Type 
of  Trench 

vSight 

100 
200 
300 

I  minute 
I  minute 
I  minute 

10-20  (*) 
10 
10 

Head 
F 
F 

Prone 

Standing 

Standing 

Leaf 
Leaf 
Leaf 

*  18  hits  out  of  possible  40  required  to  advance  to 
Record  Practice. 

Soldiers  who  fail  to  make  the  necessary  points  to  ad- 
vance are  given  further  instructions  and  practice  to  the 
limit  of  the  ammunition  allowance. 

Procedure,  Rapid  Fire  as  prescribed  for  C.  Special 
Course.  There  will  be  but  one  man  firing  at  each  target. 
The  officer  in  charge  of  the  line  will  command  Lie  Down, 
if  the  firing  is  to  be  at  100  yards,  and  then  commands 
Load.  The  magazine  will  be  filled,  the  piece  loaded  with 
one  cartridge  therefrom,  and  the  safety  lock  turned  to 
Safe.  When  all  is  ready  in  the  pit,  the  targets  to  be  fired 
upon  will  be  drawn  fully  down  (the  rear  targets  being 
blank  or  targets  of  another  class  than  those  being  fired 
upon),  and  a  red  flag  hoisted  at  the  center  target.  When 
the  red  flag  is  displayed,  the  officer  in  charge  of  the  fir- 
ing line  will  command  Ready,  when  the  safety  lock  will 
be  turned  to  the  ready  and  the  position  of  Ready  as- 
sumed, with  the  sling,  if  used,  on  the  arm.  The  officer 
in  charge  of  the  firing  line  will  then  call  so  that  all  may 
hear,  Ready  on  the  right;  ready  on  the  left.    When  the 


66        OFFICIAL  TESTS  OF  C.  SPECIAL  COURSE 

officer  in  charge  calls  out,  Ready  on  the  right,  etc.,  any 
one  who  is  not  ready  must  call  out.  Not  ready  on  target — . 
If  any  soldier  fails  to  so  call,  it  will  be  assumed  that  he 
is  ready,  and  if  he  fails  to  fire  when  the  target  appears 
he  will  be  given  a  total  miss  for  that  score. 

The  firing  line  being  ready,  the  pit  is  signaled  or  tele- 
phoned. Ready  on  the  firing  line.  When  this  signal  is  re- 
ceived in  the  pit,  the  red  flag  is  waved  and  lowered  and 
five  seconds  thereafter  the  targets  appear,  remaining  in 
sight  one  minute  and  then  disappear.  As  soon  as  any 
part  of  the  target  appears,  the  soldier  begins  to  fire  and 
attempts  to  fire  lo  shots,  reloading  with  a  full  clip 
which  is  taken  from  the  belt,  and  continues  to  fire  until  lo 
shots  are  fired  or  until  the  target  disappears. 

Each  unfired  cartridge  counts  a  miss. 

In  case  of  a  defective  cartridge  or  a  disabled  piece,  or 
when  more  than  lo  hits  are  made  on  a  target,  the  prac- 
tice is  repeated. 

At  all  ranges,  in  rapid  fire,  firing  is  from  a  full  clip, 
and  the  second  clip  must  be  loaded  from  the  belt.  In 
case  a  clip  jams  or  breaks,  cartridges  may  be  loaded 
singly. 

At  the  expiration  of  the  time  limit,  the  target  is  pulled 
down  and  marked,  all  hits  being  given  their  proper  value. 
In  case  of  more  than  lo  hits  on  a  target,  the  target  will 
not  be  marked  but  the  firing  line  will  be  notified  and  the 
firing  on  that  target  repeated.  In  case  a  soldier  fires  on 
the  wrong  target,  only  such  shots  as  he  may  have  fired 
on  his  own  target  will  be  counted  on  his  score.  He  will 
be  given  misses  for  the  remainder  of  his  score. 

In  firing  rapid  fire,  if  more  than  one  target  is  used,  the 
first  order  of  men  at  the  firing  point  will  fire  together,  one 


OFFICIAL  TESTS  OF  C.  SPECIAL  COURSE       67 

man  at  each  target,  all  targets  being  fired  upon  at  one 
time. 

93.     KECORD  PRACTICE. 


TABLE   4 

^. — RAPID 

FIRE. 

Range, 

Yards 

Time 

Shots 

Target 

Position 
and  Type 
of  Trench 

Sight 

100 
200 
300 

I  minute 
I  minute 
I  minute 

10-20  (*) 
10 
10 

Head 
F 
F 

Prone 

Standing 

Standing 

Leaf 
Leaf 
Leaf 

*  At  this  range  the  soldier  must  fire  10  rounds ;  he 
may  fire  as  many  more  as  he  can  up  to  20  rounds  and 
receive  credit  for  every  hit  he  makes.  Soldier  is  penal- 
ized I  point  for  each  round  less  than  ten  that  he  does 
not  fire. 

Total  shots,  130. 

94.  MID-RANGE  PRACTICE.  For  all  men  who  have 
made  25  hits  or  more  in  Record  Practice. 

TABLE   5. — SLOW  FIRE. 


Range 

Time 

Target 

Shots 

Position 

500 
600 

No  limit 
No  limit 

B 
B 

(Fig.  16) 

10 
10 

Prone 
Prone 

68       OFFICIAL  TESTS  OF  C.  SPECIAL  COURSE 

Every  effort  will  be  made  to  teach  the  men  the  effect 
of  wind,  light,  and  temperature,  and  the  value  of  small 
changes  in  elevation  and  windage. 

No  report  of  this  firing  will  be  required,  although  a 
record  of  it  will  be  kept  in  each  company. 

95.  PRACTICE  WITH  TELESCOPIC  SIGHTS.  After 
Mid-range  Practice  has  been  completed,  the  four  best  en- 
listed shots  of  the  company  will  fire  with  telescopic  sights, 
not  to  exceed  40  rounds  per  man  firing. 

''This  practice  is  intended  for  long  ranges  only,  but 
it  may  be  found  necessary,  until  the  rifles  are  accurately 
sighted  and  the  elevations  known,  to  start  at  shorter 
ranges  and  work  back,  no  range  being  left  until  the  tar- 
get can  be  hit  at  that  range.  This  part  of  the  practice 
will  be  at  the  discretion  of  the  officer  conducting  the  fir- 
ing. Target  B  may  be  used  if  found  necessary  to  fire  at 
ranges  shorter  than  1,000  yards.''  At  1,000  yards  and 
over  Target  C  is  used. 

"At  1,000  yards  each  man  will  fire  20  shots  for  record. 
No  report  of  the  firing  will  be  required,  although  a  rec- 
ord of  it  v/ill  be  kept  in  the  company.  This  record  will 
show  the  number  of  the  rifle  with  which  the  score  was 
made,  the  elevation  and  the  windage  used  at  the  various 
ranges,  and  the  force  and  direction  of  the  wind  at  the 
time  of  firing.  The  data  will  then  be  available  when  fur- 
ther practice  is  held  with  this  particular  rifle  and  sight. 
Practice  may  be  held  at  1,200  yards  where  a  suitable 
range  is  available."     (S.  A.  F.  M.  1913.) 

96.  COMBAT  PRACTICE.  Combat  practice,  individ- 
ual and  collective,  will  be  fired  by  an  organization  after 
the  completion  of  the  Known  Distance  Practice. 

An  annual  allowance  of  50  rounds  of  ammunition  per 


OFFICIAL  TESTS  OF  C.  SPECIAL  COURSE       69 

man,  to  be  expended  under  the  direction  of  the  regi- 
mental commander,  is  authorized  for  this  practice. 

97.  TARGETS.  Target  A-4  is  the  A  target  (Fig.  14) 
cut  down  to  4  feet  square. 

The  Head  Target  is  the  top  of  the  E  target  cut  off  12 
inches  from  the  top.     (Fig.  19.) 


Fig.   19. — Head    Target. 


CHAPTER  X 
GALLERY  PRACTICE 

98.  EIFLE.  U.  S.  Caliber  .30  or  ,22  or  any  rifle  for 
Slow  Fire.    Any  magazine  rifle  for  Rapid  Fire. 

99.  AMMUNITION.  Reduced  charge  for  .30  caliber ; 
or  .22  caliber  for  .22  caliber  rifle. 

Note.  For  Construction  of  Gallery  Ranges,  informa- 
tion may  be  obtained  from  the  Secretary  of  the  National 
Rifle  Association,  Woodward  Building,  Washington,  D. 
C,  also  from  the  E.  I.  Du  Pont  de  Nemours  Co.,  Wil- 
mington, Del. 

100.  SLOW  FIRE  COURSE.  The  following  course 
(which  was  prescribed  for  the  Organized  Militia)  is. 
suggested : 

TABLE    I. —  (S.A.F.M.,    I913,    PAGE   2Q2) 


Range, 
Feet 

Targets 

Position 

Minimum 

Number  of 

Shots 

[50 

50 
50 

The  iron  gallery  target  is- 
sued   by    the    Ordnance 
Dept.,  or  one  similar  there- 
to, or  paper  target  X. 

do 1 

do 

Prone 

Sitting     1 
Kneeling  / 
Standing 

10 

/  5  Sitting 

'""i  5  Kneeling 

10 

70 


GALLERY  PRACTICE  71 

Note.  Where  it  is  impracticable  to  use  ranges  of  50 
feet,  gallery  practice  may  be  conducted  at  a  greater  dis- 
tance at  a  target  whose  dimensions  and  divisions  have 
been  proportionately  increased. 

Firing  will  be  by  scores  of  five  consecutive  shots.  Ex- 
cept in  case  of  accidents,  a  score  once  begun  will  be  com- 
pleted. 

ftualification  in  Gallery  Practice,  Slow  Fire.  At  least 
90  points  out  of  a  possible  150. 

Target  X  is  an  ''A"  target  reduced  to  8''  wide  and  12'' 
high;  black  circular  bull's-eye  i  1-3'^;  center  ring,  4  1-3'' 
diam. ;  inner  ring  7  2-3''  diam. ;  outer,  remainder. 

Value  of  hits: 

Buirs-eye  5     Inner 3 

Center 4    Outer '. . . .  2 

Aiming  Bull.  (Fig.  20.)  As  the  sight  on  the  Model 
1903  rifle  allows  for  drift,  jump  and  elevation  with  serv- 
ice ammunition,  in  using  reduced  ammunition  at  re- 
duced ranges,  allowance  must  be  made  by  substituting  an 
aiming  bull  underneath,  and  to  one  side  of,  the  actual 
bull. 

The  location  of  this  aiming  bull  is  best  fixed  by  shoot- 
ing a  group  of  shots,  aiming  at  the  actual  bull  of  the 
target,  and  then  placing  the  aiming  bull  as  much  below 
and  to  one  side  of  the  actual  bull  as  the  mean  of  the 
group  of  shots  is  above  and  to  the  other  side  of  the 
actual  bull. 

When  the  aiming  bull's-eye  is  in  place,  the  actual  bull's- 
eye  should  be  white,  except  for  a  fine  black  line  around 
the  edge. 

The  above  test  must  be  made  separately  for  Peep  and 
Battle  Sights,  and  for  each  kind  of  rifle. 


72 


GALLERY  PRACTICE 


Fig.   20. — Example   of  Aiming   Bull   for   Target  X. 


101.     RAPID  FIRE  COURSE. 

Method  for  Rapid  Firing.  The  disappearing  target  is 
not  used  in  Rapid  Fire  in  this  course. 

In  Rapid  Fire  each  man  takes  position  standing  in 
front  of  the  target  assigned  to  him. 

The  officer  in  charge  of  the  Hne  will  command,  Load. 

The  magazine  will  be  filled,  and  the  piece  loaded  with 


GALLERY  PRACTICE 


73 


TABLE    I  a. — (adapted  FROM  CHANGE'S  S.A.F.M.   6,   PAGE  4) 

(If  U.  S.  Rifle,  the  Battle  Sight  only  will  be  used) 


Ranges, 
Actual 

Ranges, 
Simulated 

Target 

Position 

Score 

Time 

50  ft. 
50  ft. 

200  yds. 
300  yds. 

X   ■ 

Kneeling 

from 
standing 

Prone 

from 

standing 

I  min. 

I  min.  10  sec. 

one  cartridge  therefrom,  and  the  safety  lock  turned  to 
Safe. 

When  all  are  ready,  the  officer  in  charge  of  the  firing 
line  will  command,  Ready,  and  the  safety  lock  will  be 
turned  to  the  ''Ready/'  and  the  position  of  Ready, 
Standing,  assumed. 

At  command  or  signal,  Commence  Firing,  he  takes  the 
prescribed  position  (kneeling  or  prone),  opens  fire,  fires 
5  shots,  reloads  the  magazine  without  command  and 
endeavors  to  fire  5  shots  more. 

The  command  or  signal.  Cease  Firing,  is  given  at  the 
expiration  of  the  time  limit,  when  all  firing  ceases. 

Qualification  in  Gallery  Practice,  Rapid  Fire.  At  least 
60  points  out  of  a  possible  100. 


PART  II 

AUTOMATIC  PISTOL,  CALIBER 
45,  MODEL  191 1 


76 


CHAPTER  I 


NOMENCLATURE  AND  CARE  OF  THE 
PISTOL 

lOa.     PARTS.     There  are  53  parts  to  the  pistol  as  fol- 
lows (Fig.  21)  : 


1.  Receiver 

2.  Barrel 

3.  Slide 

4.  Plunger  tube 

5.  Slide  top  plunger 

6.  Plunger  spring 

7.  Safety  lock  plunger 

8.  Slide  stop 

9.  Rear  sight 

10.  Front  sight 

11.  Link 

12.  Link  pin 

13.  Barrel  bushing 

14.  Recoil  spring 

15.  Recoil-spring  guide 

16.  Plug 

17.  Extractor 

18.  Ejector 

19.  Ejector  pin 


Firing  pin 
Firing-pin  spring 
Firing-pin  stop 
Hammer 
Hammer  pin 
Hammer  strut 
Hammer  strut  pin 
Mainspring 

28.  Mainspring  cap 

29.  Mainspring-cap  pin 

30.  Sear 

31.  Sear  spring 

32.  Sear  pin 

33.  Disconnector 

34.  Trigger 
Grip  safety 
Safety  lock 
Mainspring  housing 


20. 
21. 
22. 

23. 

24. 

25. 
26. 

27 


35 
36. 
37. 


38.  Housing  pin 


77 


78   NOMENCLATURE  AND  CARE  OF  THE  PISTOL 

39.  Housing-pin  retainer  46.  Magazine  spring 

40.  Laynard  loop  47.  Magazine  follower 

41.  Laynard  loop-pin  48.  Magazine  catch 

42.  Magazine  tube  49.  Mazagine  catch  spring 

43.  Magazine  base  50.  Magazine  catch  lock 

44.  Magazine  pins    (2)  51.  Stocks,  right  and  left 

45.  Magazine  loop  52.  Stock  screws  (4) 

53.  Screw  bushings  (4) 

The  six  principal  Parts  of  the  pistol  are:  Receiver, 
Magazine,  Barrel,  Slide,  Grip-safety,   Safety-lock. 

The  Receiver  (i)  has  suitable  guides  for  the  recipro- 
cating Slide  (3)  and  a  hollow  handle  in  which  the  maga- 
zine is  inserted. 

Miscellaneous  data  concerning  pistol: 

Weight,  2  lbs.  7  oz.     Trigger  Pull,  6  to  7>^  lbs. 

Length,  8.593".     Bore,  .445'',  called  .45  caliber. 

Rifling  grooves,  6,  making  revolution  in  16  inches. 

103.  AMMUNITION.  Ball  Cartridge  Caliber  .45 
(see  War  Document  No.  1866). 

104.  CARE  OF  PISTOL.     (See  Care  of  Rifle,  Part  1.) 


CHAPTER  II 
OPERATION  OF  THE  PISTOL 

105.  METHOD  OF  OPERATION.  A  loaded  magazine 
is  placed  in  the  handle  and  the  slide  (3)  drawn  fully 
back  and  released,  thus  bringing  the  first  cartridge  into 
the  chamber  (if  the  slide  is  open,  push  down  the  slide 
stop  (8)  to  let  the  slide  (3)  go  forward).  The  hammer 
(2^)  is  thus  cocked  and  the  pistol  is  ready  for  firing. 

If  it  is  desired  to  make  the  pistol  ready  for  instant 
use  and  for  firing  with  the  least  possible  delay  the  maxi- 
mum number  of  shots,  the  magazine  being  empty,  draw 
back  the  slide  (3),  insert  a  cartridge  by  hand  into  the 
chamber  of  the  barrel  (2),  allow  the  slide  (3)  to  close, 
and  lock  the  slide  (3)  and  the  cocked  hammer  (23)  by 
pressing  the  safety  lock  (36)  upward,  and  insert  a  loaded 
magazine.  The  sHde  (3)  and  hammer  (23)  being  thus 
positively  locked,  the  pistol  may  be  caried  safely  at  full 
cock,  and  it  is  only  necessary  to  press  down  the  safety 
lock  (36)  (which  is  located  within  easy  reach  of  the 
thumb)  when  raising  the  pistol  to  the  firing  position. 

The  grip  safety  (35)  is  provided  with  an  extending 
horn,  which  not  only  serves  as  a  guard  to  prevent  the 
hand  of  the  shooter  from  slipping  upward  and  being 
struck  or  injured  by  the  hammer  (23)  but  also  aids 
in  accurate  shooting  by  keeping  the  hand  in  the  same 

79 


8o  OPERATION  OF  THE  PISTOL 

position  for  each  shot;  and,  furthermore,  permits  the 
lowering  of  the  cocked  hammer  (23)  with  one  hand  by 
automatically  pressing  in  the  safety  grip  (35)  when  the 
hammer  (23)  is  drawn  slightly  beyond  the  cocked  posi- 
tion. In  order  to  release  the  hammer  (23),  the  grip 
safety  (35)  must  be  pressed  in  before  the  trigger  (34)  is 
pulled. 

106.  TO  DISMOUNT  AND  ASSEMBLE  PISTOL.  Re- 
move the  magazine  by  pressing  the  magazine  catch  (49) . 

Press  the  plug  (16)  inward  and  turn  the  barrel 
bushing  (13)  to  the  right  until  the  plug  (16)  and  the 
end  of  the  recoil  spring  (14)  protrude  from  their  seat, 
releasing  the  tension  of  the  spring  (14).  As  the  plug 
(16)  is  allowed  to  protrude  from  its  seat,  the  finger  or 
thumb  should  be  kept  over  it,  so  that  it  will  not  jump 
away  or  be  lost  or  strike  the  operator.  Draw  the  slide 
(3)  rearward  until  the  smaller  rear  recess  in  its  lower 
left  edge  stands  above  the  projection  on  the  thumb  piece 
of  the  slidestop  (8)  ;  press  gently  against  the  end  of 
the  pin  of  the  slide  stop  which  protrudes  from  the  right 
side  of  the  receiver  (i)  above  the  trigger  guard  and 
remove  the  slide  stop  (8). 

This  releases  the  link  (11),  allowing  the  barrel  (2), 
with  the  link  (11)  and  the  slide  (3),  to  be  drawn  for- 
ward together  from  the  receiver  (i),  carrying  with 
them  the  barrel  bushing  (13),  recoil  spring  (14),  plug 
(16),  and  recoil-spring  guide  (15). 

Remove  these  parts  from  the  slide  (3)  by  withdraw- 
ing the  recoil-spring  guide  (15)  from  the  rear  of  the 
recoil  spring  (14)  and  drawing  the  plug  (16)  and  the 
recoil  spring  (14)  forward  from  the  shde  (3).  Turn 
plug   (16)    to   right  to  remove  the  recoil   spring    (14). 


OPERATION  OF  THE  PISTOL  8i 

Turn  the  barrel  bushing  (13)  to  the  left  until  it  may  be 
drawn  forward  from  the  slide   (3).     This  releases  the 
barrel   (2)    which,  with  the  link    (11),  may  be  drawn 
forward  from  the  slide. 
To  Assemble.     Reverse  the  process. 

107.  SAFETY  DEVICES.  It  is  impossible  for  the 
firing  pin  (20)  to  discharge  or  even  touch  the  primer, 
except  on  receiving  the  full  blow  of  the  hammer  (23). 

The  pistol  is  provided  with  two  automatic  safety  de- 
vices : 

(i)  The  (automatic)  disconnector  (33)  which  posi- 
tively prevents  the  release  of  the  hammer  (23)  unless 
the  slide  (3)  and  barrel  (2)  are  in  the  forward  position 
and  safely  interlocked.  This  device  also  controls  the 
firing  and  prevents  more  than  one  shot  from  following 
each  pull  of  the  trigger  (34). 

(2)  The  (automatic)  grip  safety  (35)  at  aU  times 
locks  the  trigger  (34)  unless  the  handle  is  firmly  grasped 
and  the  grip  safety   (35)   pressed  in. 

The  pistol  is  in  addition  provided  with  a  safety  lock 
(36)  by  which  the  closed  slide  (3)  and  the  cocked  ham- 
mer (23)  can  be  at  will  positively  locked  in  position. 

108.  IMPORTANT  POINTS,  i.  Never  place  the  trig- 
ger finger  ivithin  the  trigger  guard  until  it  is  intended  to 
fire  and  the  pistol  is  pointed  toward  the  target. 

2.  Do  not  carry  the  pistol  in  the  holster  with  the  ham- 
mer cocked  and  safety  lock  on  excepting  in  an  emer- 
gency. If  the  pistol  is  so  carried  in  the  holster  cocked 
and  safety  lock  on,  the  butt  of  the  pistol  should  be  ro- 
tated away  from  the  body  when  withdrawing  the  pistol 
from  the  holster,  in  order  to  avoid  the  displacing  of  the 
safety  lock. 


82  OPERATION  OF  THE  PISTOL 

3.  The  trigger  should  be  squeezed  with  the  forefinger. 
If  the  trigger  is  squeezed  with  the  second  finger,  the 
forefinger  extending  along  the  side  of  the  receiver  is  apt 
to  pass  against  the  projecting  pin  of  the  sHde  stop  and 
cause  a  jam  when  the  slide  recoils. 

4.  Care  must  be  exercised  in  inserting  the  magazine  to 
insure  its  engaging  with  the  magazine  catch. 

5.  Pressure  must  be  entirely  relieved  from  the  trigger 
after  each  shot,  in  order  that  the  trigger  may  reengage 
the  sear. 

6.  To  remove  cartridges  not  fired,  disengage  the  maga- 
zine slightly,  and  then  extract  the  cartridge  in  the  barrel 
by  drawing  back  the  slide. 

7.  The  pistol  must  be  kept  clean,  free  from  rust  and 
properly  oiled.  Excessive  oil  left  in  the  mechanism  will 
cause  the  parts  to  gum  and  work  stiffly. 

8.  Care  must  be  exercised  to  insure  that  the  discon- 
nector is  properly  assembled  in  the  sear. 

9.  The  hammer  should  not  be  snapped  when  the  pistol 
is  partially  disassembled. 

10.  The  stocks  need  never  be  removed,  as  the  pistol 
can  be  dismounted  and  assembled  without  removing 
them. 

11.  Do  not  use  a  hammer  either  in  assembling  or  dis- 
mounting the  pistol. 

12.  Reasonable  care  should  be  taken  to  see  that  the 
magazine  is  not  dented  or  otherwise  damaged. 

13.  Careless  handling  of  the  pistol  or  revolver  is  the 
cause  of  many  accidents  and  results  in  broken  parts  of 
the  mechanism.  The  following  rules  will,  if  followed, 
prevent  much  trouble  of  this  character : 

(a)   On  taking  the  pistol  from  the  armrack  or  holster, 


OPERATION  OF  THE  PISTOL  83 

take  out  the  magazine  and  see  that  it  is  empty  before  re- 
placing it;  then  draw  back  the  slide  and  make  sure  that 
the  piece  is  unloaded.  Observe  the  same  precaution  after 
practice  on  the  target  range,  and  again  before  replacing 
the  pistol  in  the  holster  or  in  the  armrack.  When  taking 
the  pistol  from  the  armrack  or  holster  and  before  re- 
turning it  to  the  same,  open  the  cylinder  and  eject  empty 
shells  and  cartridges.  Before  beginning  a  drill  and  upon 
arriving  on  the  range  observe  the  same  precautions. 

(b)  On  a  range,  neither  load  nor  cock  the  weapon 
until  the  moment  of  iiring  nor  until  a  run  in  the  mounted 
course  is  started. 

(c)  When  not  otherwise  directed,  ahvays  keep  the 
pistol  or  the  revolver  in  the  position  of  Raise  Pistol,  ex- 
cept when  it  is  pointed  on  the  target. 

(d)  Do  not  place  the  weapon  on  the  ground  where 
sand  or  earth  can  enter  the  bore  or  mechanism. 

(e)  Before  loading  the  pistol,  draw  back  the  slide  and 
look  through  the  bore  to  see  that  it  is  free  from  obstruc- 
tion. Before  loading  the  revolver,  open  the  cylinder 
and  look  through  the  bore  to  see  that  it  is  free  from 
obstruction. 

(f)  Do  not  point  the  weapon  in  any  direction  zvhere 
an  accidental  discharge  may  mean  harm. 

(g)  /Keep  the  working  parts  properly  lubricated. 


CHAPTER  III 
NEW  MANUAL  OF  THE  PISTOL 

109.  (1)  WHEN  A  LANYARD  IS  USED,  the  snaps 
are  attached  to  the  butt  of  the  pistol  and  the  magazine, 
the  lanyard  is  passed  over  the  head,  and  the  sliding  loop 
drawn  snug  against  the  arm-pit.  The  lanyard  should 
then  be  of  such  length  that  the  arm  can  be  extended 
without  constraint. 

110.  (2)  TO  RAISE  PISTOL,  the  Pistol  being  in  the 
holster,     i.  Raise,  2.  Pistol  (Fig.  22). 

Raise.  Unbutton  the  flap  of  the  holster  with  the  right 
hand  and  grasp  the  stock,  back  of  the  hand  outward. 

Pistol.  Draw  the  pistol  from  the  holster;  reverse  it, 
muzzle  up,  the  hand  holding  the  stock  with  the  thumb 
and  the  last  three  fingers,  forefinger  outside  the  guard, 
barrel  to  the  rear  and  inclined  to  the  front  at  an  angle 
of  30  degrees,  hand  as  high  as  the  neck  and  6  inches  in 
front  of  the  point  of  the  right  shoulder.  This  is  the 
position  of  raise  pistol^  and  it  may  similarly  be  taken 
from  any  position. 

111.  (3)  TO  LOWER  PISTOL,  i.  Lower,  2.  Pistol. 
At  the  command,  Pistol,  lower  the  pistol  without  chang- 
ing the  grasp  and  rest  the  hand  and  pistol  on  the  right 
thigh,  back  of  hand  up,  muzzle  in  front  of  right  knee. 

When  dismounted,  lower  the  pistol  without  changing 

84 


NEW  MANUAL  OF  THE  PISTOL 


85 


the  grasp  of  the  hand  by  the  side  and  nearly  extended, 
back  of  hand  to  the  right,  barrel  inclined  to  the  front  and 
downward. 

This  position  will  not  be  used  in  close  order  mounted. 


Fig.   22. — Raise  Pistol. 


112.  (4)  TO  WITHDRAW  MAGAZINE,  Pisiol  in  any 
position.     I.  Withdraw,  2.  Magazine. 

At  the  command,  Magazine,  turn  back  of  left  (rein) 
hand  down,  place  pistol,  barre>  down,  in  left  hand  (on 
reins)  and  clasp  barrel  in  full  grip  of  left  hand,  thumb 
clasped  over  barrel  in  front  of  trigger  guard,  butt  of 
pistol  up,  barrel  pointing  to  the  left  front  and  slightly 
downward.     With  tip  of  right  forefinger  press  stud,  re- 


86  NEW  MANUAL  OF  THE  PISTOL 

leasing  magazine,  and  then  place  tip  of  same  finger  under 
projection  in  front  of  magazine  base.  Raise  magazine 
about  an  inch,  then  close  thumb  and  second  finger  on 
sides  of  magazine,  giving  a  secure  grasp  with  which  it 
can  be  drawn  from  socket  in  the  butt  and  placed  inside 
the  belt  (in  pocket  of  shirt  or  otherwise  disposed  of 
without  throwing  it  away).  Right  hand  then  grasps 
.  stock  back  of  hand  to  the  left. 

113.  (5)  TO  OPEN"  CHAMBEE,  the  Pistol  in  any  Posi- 
tion.    I.  Open,  2.  Chamber. 

Carry  the  pistol  to  the  left  hand  (if  not  already  there) 
barrel  to  the  left,  front  end  of  slide  grasped  between 
thumb  and  forefinger  of  left  hand;  right  hand  grasping 
stock,  back  of  hand  up,  right  thumb  under  slide  stop. 
Hold  left  hand  steady  and  push  forward  with  right  hand 
till  slide  reaches  end  of  stroke ;  engage  slide  stop,  and 
come  to  Raise  Pistol.  Should  the  pistol  be  cocked  and 
locked,  it  will  be  unlocked  so  that  the  slide  can  move. 

114.  (6)  TO  CLOSE  CHAMBER,  i.  Close,  2.  Chamber. 
At  the  command,  Close  Chamber,  release  slide  stop  with 

right  thumb  and  let  hammer  down  gently.  To  let  ham- 
mer down,  pull  downward  with  point  of  right  thumb 
till  hammer  presses  against  the  grip  safety  and  forces  it 
home,  then  while  continuing  this  pressure  on  hammer, 
pull  trigger,  and  while  continuing  pull  on  trigger,  let 
hammer  down;  while  letting  hammer  down,  grasp  stock 
firmly  between  the  palm  ^nd  last  three  fingers  to  prevent 
pistol  rotating  in  hand. 

115.  (7)  TO  INSERT  MAGAZINE,  i.  Insert,  2.  Maga- 
zine. Lower  pistol  into  left  hand  as  in  Withdraw  Maga- 
zine ,  grasp  magazine  with  tip  of  right  forefinger  on  pro- 


NEW  MANUAL  OF  THE  PISTOL  87 

jection  at  base  of  magazine,  withdraw  from  pocket  and 
insert  in  pistol.  To  make  sure  that  the  magazine  is  home, 
strike  base  of  magazine  with  palm  of  right  hand.  Bring 
the  pistol  to  the  position  of  Raise  Pistol. 

116.  (8)  TO  RETURN  PISTOL,  being  at  Raise  Pistol. 

1.  Return,  2.  PistoL  Lower  the  pistol  and  raise  the  flap 
of  the  holster  with  the  right  thumb;  insert  the  pistol 
in  the  holster  and  push  it  down,  button  the  flap  with 
the  right  hand.  If  the  pistol  is  loaded  and  cocked,  the 
command,  I.  Lock,  2.  Pistol,  must  precede  the  command, 
Return, 

117.  (9)  TO  LOAD,  having  Loaded  Magazine  in  Pis- 
tol, Pistol  in  any  Position,  Chamber  Empty.       i.  Load, 

2.  PistoL 

Place  pistol  in  left  hand,  barrel  down,  butt  of  pistol  up, 
barrel  pointing  to  the  left  and  downwards,  shde  grasped 
between  thumb  and  forefinger.  Push  forward  with  right 
hand  until  slide  is  fully  open,  then  release  slide  allowing 
it  to  move  forward  and  load  cartridge  in  chamber.  Come 
to  Raise  Pistol.  If  the  last  shot  in  the  magazine  has  been 
fired,  to  reload,  same  command,  but  execute  Withdraw 
Magazine,  Insert  Magazine,  Close  Chamber.  As  soon 
as  the  pistol  is  loaded  it  will  be  immediately  locked  by 
the  commands,  i.  Lock,  2.  Pistol.  Should  the  command 
for  locking  pistol  be  inadvertently  omitted  it  will  be 
locked  without  command. 

118.  (10)  TO  UNLOAD  PISTOL,  being  in  any  posi- 
tion, Loaded.  Execute  by  the  commands,  i.  Withdraw 
Magazine,  2.  Open  Chamber,  3.  Close  Chamber,  4.  Insert 
Magazine. 


88  NEW  MANUAL  OF  THE  PISTOL 

119.  (11)  TO  INSPECT  PISTOL,  it  being  in  the  hol- 
ster,   I.  Inspection,  2.  Pistol. 

Execute  Raise  Pistol. 

To  inspect  pistol  more  minutely  add,  3.  Withdraw 
Magazine,  4.  Open  Chamber. 

To  avoid  accidents,  individual  men  out  of  ranks,  in 
barracks  or  camp,  will  first  Withdrazv  Magazine  and 
then  open  chamber,  whenever  the  pistol  is  removed  from 
the  holster  for  cleaning,  for  examination  or  for  any 
other  purpose.  Accidental  discharges  will  not  occur  if 
the  above  rule  is  always  observed,  and  failure  to  ob- 
serve it  must  be  considered  a  military  offense,  whether 
or  not  accidents  result. 

120.  PRECAUTION.  Whenever  men  fall  in  ranks 
with  the  automatic  pistol,  the  ofBcer  or  non-commissioned 
officer  in  charge  will  command : 

I.  Raise,  2.  Pistol 

I.  Withdraw,  2.  Magazine 

I.  Open,  2.  Chamber 

I.  Close,  2.  Chamber 

I.  Insert,  2.  Magazine 

I.  Return,  2.  Pistol 

When  falling  in  (dismounted),  the  above  commands 
are  given  after  the  chambers  of  rifles  have  been  opened 
and  closed,  and  the  Order  resumed,  the  rifle  being  held 
against  the  left  wrist.  The  commander  of  any  troop  or 
detachment  thereof  is  responsible  for  giving  the  neces- 
sary commands  to  put  the  pistols  in  a  safe  condition. 

121.  THE  PISTOL,  with  cartridges  in  chamber,  IS 
HABITUALLY  CARRIED  cocked  and  locked,  whether  in 
the  hand  or  in  the  holster.  The  hammer  will  not  be  low- 
ered while  the  cartridge  is  in  the  chamber. 


NEW  MANUAL  OF  THE  PISTOL  89 

In  campaign,  the  pistol  should  habitually  be  carried 
with  a  magazine  in  the  socket  loaded  with  seven  ball 
cartridges,  chamber  empty;  hammer  down.  The  extra 
magazine  should  also  be  loaded  with  seven  ball  cart- 
ridges each. 

122.  WHEN  ACTION  SEEMS  IMMINENT,  the  pistol 
should  be  loaded  by  command.  It  may  then  be  returned 
by  command  to  the  holster  till  the  time  for  its  use  ar- 
rives. 

123.  RECRUITS  ARE  FIRST  TAUGHT  the  motions 
of  loading  and  firii;ig  without  using  cartridges.  However, 
the  automatic  acti-bn  and  the  effect  of  ball  cartridges  in 
operating  the  slide  cannot  be  taught  without  firing  ball 
cartridges. 

Practice  without  cartridges  is  very  necessary  to  acquire 
facility  in  the  exact  movements  of  the  manual,  and  in 
aiming,  holding  and  trigger  squeeze. 

To  execute  the  movements  without  cartridges,  first 
Withdraw  Magazine,  Open  Chamber,  and  examine  both 
pistols  and  magazines  to  assure  that  none  contain  ball 
cartridges. 

124.  PISTOL  ASSUMED  LOADED.  The  automatic 
Pistol  must,  at  all  times,  be  assumed  to  be  loaded  with 
ball  cartridges  until  an  inspection  has  disclosed  that  it  is 
not  so  loaded. 

All  the  movements  in  loading  pistol  should  be  practiced 
without  looking  at  it.  In  order  to  do  this  successfully, 
it  is  necessary  to  know  exactly  where  the  magazines  are 
carried  so  that  the  hand  may  find  them  without  fumbling ; 
also,  since  the  projection  at  the  front  of  the  magazine 
base  is  on  the  same  side  as  the  bullets,  and  the  magazine 
must  be  inserted  in  the  socket  with  these  to  the  front, 


go  NEW  MANUAL  OF  THE  PISTOL 

the  magazine  should  be  carried  in  the  pocket  with  the 
projection  to  the  left  and  should  be  withdrawn  from  the 
pocket  with  the  same  grasp  as  is  prescribed  for  With- 
draw Magazine. 

This  manual  must  be  practiced  with  all  the  precision 
and  exactness  required  for  the  Manual  of  the  Rifle ;  thus 
accidents  will  be  reduced  to  a  minimum  and  familiarity 
with  the  pistol  gained. 


CHAPTER  IV 
MUSCLE  EXERCISES 

125.  IN  ORDER  TO  SHOOT  WELL  with  the  pistol  or 
revolver,  the  muscles  of  the  hand  and  arm  must  be  well 
developed  and  under  control  of  the  mind.  This  develop- 
ment and  control  can  only  be  secured  by  practice,  and 
to  secure  them  the  following  exercises  will  be  practiced 
daily,  the  number  of  times  each  exercise  is  repeated  be- 
ing gradually  increased  as  the  muscles  become  devel- 
oped. 

126.  FIRST  EXERCISE.  One.  Arms  sidezvard,  palms 
up.  Two.  Raise.  Three.  Finger  Exercise.  Four. 
Close,  Five.  Open.  Close  and  open  the  fingers  vigor- 
ously, separating  the  fingers  when  open.  Resume  the 
Position  of  a  Soldier  at  the  command,  Halt.  Vary  the 
exercise  by  turning  the  palms  to  the  front,  down,  and  to 
the  rear. 

127.  SECOND  EXERCISE.  One.  Arms  sidezvard, 
palms  up.  Two.  Raise.  Three.  Wrist  Exencise.  Four. 
Up.  Five.  Dozvn,  or  Four.  Front.  Five.  Rear.  Bend 
the  wrist  according  to  the  command,  keeping  the  fingers 
extended  and  joined.  Resume  the  Position  of  a  Soldier 
at  the  command,  Halt.  Vary  the  exercise  as  in  First 
Exercise. 

91 


92  MUSCLE  EXERCISES 

128.  THIRD  EXERCISE.  One.  Right  arm  forward. 
Two.  Raise,  Three.  Forefinger  Exercise.  Four.  Close. 
Five.  Open.  Close  and  open  the  forefinger  vigorously 
without  moving  the  other  fingers,  which  are  held  tightly 
closed  as  in  gripping  the  pistol.  Resume  the  Position  of 
a  Soldier  at  the  command,  Halt. 


CHAPTER  V 
POSITION  INSTRUCTION 

129.  POSITION  DISMOUNTED.  Stand  firmly  on  both 
feet,  body  perfectly  balanced  and  erect,  facing  the  target, 
the  feet  far  enough  apart  to  insure  firmness  and  steadi- 
ness of  position  (about  8  to  lo  inches)  ;  weight  of  body 
borne  squarely  upon  both  feet;  right  arm  extended  to- 
ward the  target  straight  without  stiffness ;  left  arm  hang- 
ing naturally. 

130.  THE  GRIP.  Grasp  the  stock  as  high  as  pos- 
sible with  the  thumb  and  last  three  fingers,  the. forefinger 
alongside  the  trigger  guard,  the  thumb  extended  along 
the  stock.  The  barrel,  hand,  and  forearm  should  be  as 
nearly  in  one  Hne  as  possible  when  the  w^eapon  is  pointed 
toward  the  target.  The  grasp  should  not  be  so  tight  as 
to  cause  tremors  of  the  hand  or  arm  to  be  communicated 
to  the  weapon,  but  should  be  firm  enough  to  avoid  los- 
ing the  grip^  when  the  recoil  takes  place. 

The  force  of  recoil  of  pistol  or  revolver  is  exerted  in  a 
line  above  the  hand  which  grasps  the  stock.  The  lower 
the  stock  is  grasped  the  greater  will  be  the  movement  (or 
jump)  of  the  muzzle  caused  by  the  recoil.  This  not 
only  results  in  a  severe  strain  upon  the  wrist  but  in  loss 
of  accuracy. 

If  the  hand  be  placed  so  that  the  grasp  is  on  one  side 

93 


94  POSITION  INSTRUCTION 

of  the  stock,  the  recoil  will  cause  a  rotary  movement 
towards  the  opposite  side. 

The  releasing  of  the  sear  causes  a  slight  movement  of 
the  muzzle  generally  to  the  left.  The  position  of  the 
thumb  along  the  stock  overcomes  much  of  this  move- 
ment. The  soldier  should  be  encouraged  to  practice  this 
method  of  holding  until  it  becomes  natural. 

To  do  uniform  shooting,  the  weapon  must  be  held 
with  exactly  the  same  grip  for  each  shot.  Not  only 
must  the  hand  grasp  the  stock  at  the  same  point  for  each 
shot,  but  the  tension  of  the  grip  must  be  uniform. 

131.  THE  TRIGGER  SaUEEZE.  The  trigger  must  be 
squeezed  in  the  same  manner  as  in  rifle  firing.  The  pres- 
sure of  the  forefinger  on  the  trigger  should  be  steadily 
increased  and  straight  back,  and  not  sideways.  The 
pressure  should  continue  to  that  point  beyond  which  the 
slightest  movement  will  release  the  sear.  Then,  when 
the  aim  is  true,  the  additional  pressure  is  applied  and  the 
pistol  fired. 

Only  by  much  practice  can  the  soldier  become  familiar 
with  the  trigger  squeeze.  This  is  essential  to  accurate 
shooting.  It  is  the  most  important  detail  to  master  in 
pistol  or  revolver  shooting. 

132.  AIMING.  Except  when  delivering  Rapid  or 
Quick  Fire,  the  rear  and  front  sights  of  the  pistol  are 
used  in  the  same  manner  as  the  rifle  sights.  The  normal 
sight  is  habitually  used  (Fig.  23),  and  the  line  of  sight  is 
directed  upon  a  point  just  under  the  bull's-eye  at  "6 
o'clock."  The  front  must  be  seen  through  the  middle 
of  the  rear  sight  notch,  the  top  being  on  a  line  with  the 
top  of  the  notch.  Care  must  be  taken  not  to  cant  the 
pistol  to  either  side. 


Fig.   23. — I*istol,  Normal  Sight.         Fig.   24. — Pistol  Sighting  Rest. 

95 


96  POSITION  INSTRUCTION 

If  the  principles  of  aiming  have  not  been  taught,  the 
soldier's  instruction  will  begin  with  sighting  drills  as 
prescribed  for  the  rifle  so  far  as  they  may  be  applicable. 
The  sighting  bar  with  open  sight  will  be  used  to  teach 
the  normal  sight  and  to  demonstrate  errors  likely  to  be 
committed. 

133.  SIGHTING  REST.  To  construct  a  sighting  rest 
for  the  pistol  (Fig.  24),  take  a  piece  of  wood  about  10 
inches  long,  ij4  inches  wide  and  9/16  inches  thick. 
Shape  one  end  so  that  it  will  fit  sn\igly  in  the  handle 
of  the  pistol  when  the  magazine  has  been  removed. 
Screw  or  nail  this  stick  to  the  top  of  a  post  or  other 
object  at  such  an  angle  that  the  pistol,  when  placed  on 
the  stick,  will  be  approximately  horizontal.  A  suitable 
sighting  rest  for  the  revolver  may  be  improvised. 

134.  HOW  TO  COCK  THE.PISTOL.  The  pistol  should 
be  cocked  by  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand  and  with  the 
least  possible  derangement  of  the  grip.  The  forefinger 
should  be  clear  of  the  trigger  when  cocking  the  pistol. 
Some  men  have  difficulty  at  first  in  cocking  the  pistol 
with  the  right  thumb.  This  can  be  overcome  by  a  little 
practice.  Jerking  the  pistol  forward  while  holding  the 
right  thumb  on  the  hammer  will  not  be  permitted. 

135.  POSITION  AND  AIMING  DRILLS,  DIS- 
MOUNTED. For  this  instruction  the  squad  will  be 
formed  with  an  interval  of  i  pace  between  files.  Black 
pasters  to  simulate  bull's-eyes  will  be  pasted  opposite 
each  man  on  the  barrack  or  other  wall,  from  which  the 
squad  is  ten  paces  distant. 

The  squad  being  formed  as  described  above,  the  in- 
structor gives  the  command,  i.  Raise,  2.  Pistol,  and  cau- 


POSITION  INSTRUCTION  97 

tions,  Position  and  Aiming  Drill,  Dismounted.  The  men 
take  the  positions  described  in  Section  129,  except  that 
the  pistol  is  held  at  Raise  Pistol. 

Trig"ger-Squeeze  Exercise.  The  instructor  cautions, 
Trigger-Squeeze  Exercise,  At  the  command,  Ready, 
cock  the  weapon  with  the  thumb.  At  the  command,  i. 
Squad,  2.  Fire,  slowly  extend  the  arm  until  it  is  nearly 
horizontal,  the  pistol  directed  at  a  point  about  six  inches 
below  the  bull's-eye.  At  the  same  time  put  the  forefinger 
inside  the  trigger  guard  and  gradually  "feel"  the  trigger. 
Inhale  enough  air  to  comfortably  fill  the  lungs  and  grad- 
ually raise  the  piece  until  the  line  of  sight  is  directed  at 
the  point  of  aim,  i.e.,  just  below  the  bull's-eye  at  6  o'clock. 
While  the  sights  are  directed  upon  the  mark,  gradually 
increase  the  pressure  on  the  trigger  until  it  reaches  the 
point  where  the  slightest  additional  pressure  will  release 
the  sear.  Then,  when  the  aim  is  true,  the  additional 
pressure  necessary  to  fire  the  piece  is  given  so  smoothly 
as  not  to  derange  the  alignment  of  the  sights.  The 
weapon  will  be  held  on  the  mark  for  an  instant  after 
the  hammer  falls  and  the  soldier  will  observe  what  ef- 
fect, if  any,  the  squeezing  of  the  trigger  has  had  on  his 
aim.  As  it  is  generally  impossible  to  hold  the  arm  per- 
fectly still,  each  time  the  line  of  sights  is  directed  on  the 
point  of  aim  a  slight  additional  pressure  is  applied  to  the 
trigger  until  the  piece  is  finally  discharged  at  one  of  the 
moments  when  the  sights  afe  correctly  aligned  upon  the 
mark. 

When  the  soldier  has  become  proficient  in  taking  the 
proper  position,  the  trigger  squeeze  should  be  executed 
at  will.  The  instructor  prefaces.  At  Will,  and  gives  the 
command.  Halt,  at  the  conclusion  of  the  exercise,  when 


98  POSITION  INSTRUCTION 

the  soldier  will  return  to  the  position  of  Raise  Pistol. 

At  first,  this  exercise  should  be  executed  with  delibera- 
tion, but  gradually  the  soldier  will  be  taught  to  catch  the 
aim  quickly  and  to  lose  no  time  in  beginning  the  trigger 
squeeze  and  bringing  it  to  the  point  where  the  slightest 
additional  pressure  will  release  the  sear.  (It  has  even 
been  found  practicable  to  discharge  5  aimed  shots  in  five 
seconds.) 

Remarks.  In  service  few  opportunities  will  be  of- 
fered for  slow  aimed  fire  with  the  pistol,  or  revolver, 
although  use  will  be  made  of  the  weapon  under  circum- 
stances when  the  accurate  pointing  and  rapid  manipula- 
tion are  of  vital  importance. 

In  delivering  a  rapid  fire,  the  soldier  must  keep  his 
eyes  fixed  on  the  mark  and,  after  each  shot,  begin  a 
steadily  increasing  pressure  on  the  trigger,  trying  at  the 
same  time  to  get  the  sights  as  nearly  on  the  mark  as 
possible  before  the  hammer  again  falls.  The  great  dif- 
ficulty in  quick  firing  with  the  pistol  lies  in  the  fact 
that  when  the  front  sight  is  brought  upon  the  mark,  the 
rear  sight  is  often  found  to  be  outside  the  line  joining  the 
eye  with  the  mark.  This  tendency  to  hold  the  pistol 
obliquely  can  be  overcome  only  by  a  uniform  manner  of 
holding  and  pointing.  This  uniformity  is  to  be  obtained 
only  by  acquiring  a  grip  which  can  be  taken  with  cer- 
tainty each  time  the  weapon  is  fired.  It  is  this  circum- 
stance which  makes  the  position  and  aiming  drills  so  im- 
portant. The  soldier  should  constantly  practice  pointing 
the  pistol  until  he  acquires  the  ability  to  direct  it  on  the 
mark  in  the  briefest  interval  of  time  taking  aim  and 
at  close  quarters  without  taking  aim,  can  get  practical 
results.     In  other  words,  the  pistol  in  this  exercise  may 


POSITION  INSTRUCTION  99 

be  accurately  pointed .  instead  of  accurately  aimed.  In 
night  firing,  pointing  the  pistol  is  the  only  method  that 
can  be  used  and  is  practical  and  effective. 

ftuick  Fire  Exercise.  Being  at  Raise  Pistol  Chamber 
and  Magazine  empty,  ftuick  Fire  Exercise:  One. 
Lozver  the  forearm  until  it  is  nearly  horizontal,  pistol 
pointing  at  the  target.  Two.  Thrust  the  pistol  forward  to 
the  position  of  aim,  snapping  the  pistol  just  before  the 
arm  reaches  its  full  extension.  Then  look  through  the 
sights  to  verify  the  pointing.  Three.  Return  to  Raise 
Pistol  and  cock-  the  pistol. 

To  Draw  and  Fire  ftuickly,  Snap  Shooting^.  With  the 
squad  formed  as  previously  described  except  that  the 
pistol  is  in  the  holster  unloaded,  but  cocked  and  locked, 
and  the  flap,  if  any,  buttoned,  the  instructor  cautions, 
Quick  Fire  Exercise,  and  gives  the  command,  i.  Squad,  2. 
Fire.  At  this  command,  each  soldier,  keeping  his  eye 
on  the  target,  quickly  draws  his  pistol,  unlocks  the  safety 
with  his  right  thumb,  thrusts  the  pistol  towards  the  tar- 
get, squeezes  the  trigger,  and  at  the  same  instant  the 
weapon  is  brought  into  the  line  with  the  eye  and  the 
objective,  increases  the  pressure,  releasing  the  sear.  To 
enable  the  soldier  to  note  error  in  pointing,  the  weapon 
will  be  momentarily  held  in  position  after  the  fall  of  the 
hammer.  Efforts  at  deliberate  aiming  in  this  exercise 
must  he  discouraged. 

When  the  soldier  has  become  proficient  in  the  details 
of  this  exercise,  it  should  be  repeated  at  will;  the  in- 
structor cautions,  at  Will,  quick  fire  exercise. 

To  Fire  to  the  Right  and  Left  Front,  the  instructor 
places  the  squad  so  that  the  simulated  bull's-eyes  are  in 
turn,  to  the  right,  front  and  the  left  front.     With  the 


100  POSITION  INSTRUCTION 

squad  in  one  of  these  positions,  the  instructor  commands, 
Raise  Pistol,  and  cautions,  Position  and  Aiming  Drills, 
Right  (or  Left)  Front.  The  instructor  then  commands, 
I.  Squad,  2.  Fire.  At  the  command,  Fire,  the  shoulders 
are  turned  about  45  degrees  to  the  right  (or  left)  and 
the  pistol  snapped  as  in  Quick  Fire  Exercise.  In  firing  to 
the  left  front  the  pistol  will  be  in  front  and  to  the  left 
of  the  left  shoulder.  The  exercise  is  to  be  executed  At 
Will  when  the  squad  has  been  sufficiently  well  instructed 
in  detail. 


CHAPTER  VI 
RANGE  PRACTICE 

Range  practice  will  be  held  as  described  below.  The 
different  classes  of  fire  being: 

136.  SLOW  FIKE.  Target  A  is  used  so  that  the 
kind  and  magnitude  of  the  errors  committed  by  the 
firer  become  at  once  evident  to  him.  Abundant  time  is 
permitted  in  the  firing  to  enable  proper  explanation  of 
the  causes  and  remedies  for  such  errors  to  be  pointed 
out.  It  is  designed  as  the  elementary  phase  of  instruc- 
tion in  the  proper  manipulation  of  the  weapon  and  in 
determining  and  correcting  the  personal  errors  of  the 
firer. 

137.  QUICK  FIRE.  Use  Target  E,  five  yards  apart, 
one  for  each  man  firing.  Position  the  same  as  that  pre- 
scribed for  Raise  Pistol  with  interval.  Being  at  Raise 
Pistol,  pistols  locked,  at  the -command,  Commence  firing, 
unlock,  fire  and  return  to  Raise  pistol  after  each  shot, 
following  the  principles  of  Quick  Fire  Exercise. 

In  Quick  Fire  the  target  is  operated  as  a  bobbing  tar- 
get. Three  to  five  seconds  after  notice  is  received  in 
the  pit  that  all  is  ready  at  the  firing  g^ftnt,  the  target  is 
alternately  exposed  to  and  turned  from  view  of  the  fir- 

lOI 


102  RANGE  PRACTICE 

ing  point,  exposures  being  of  three  to  four  seconds  dura- 
tion, depending  on  the  range,  with  an  interval  of  three 
to  five  seconds  between  exposures.  If  bobbing  targets 
are  impracticable,  time  is  regulated  at  the  'Tiring  Point." 

138.  AUTOMATIC  FIRE.  Use  Target  E.  Being  at 
Raise  Pistol,  pistols  locked;  at  the  command.  Commence 
Firing,  unlock  and  empty  the  magazine  in  seven  seconds, 
keeping  the  arm  extended.  Position  is  the  same  as  for 
Slow  Fire. 

139.  TRENCH  FIRE.  Target,  two  lines  of  E  targets. 
The  first  line  is  composed  of  E  targets,  five  yards  apart, 
one  figure  for  each  man  firing.  The  second  line  is  com- 
posed of  two  figures,  one  yard  apart,  for  each  man  fir- 
ing, placed  in  a  trench  immediately  in  rear  of  the  fig- 
ures of  the  first  line.  This  gives  for  each  firer  a  group 
of  three  figures,  one  placed  on  top  at  the  near  edge  of 
the  trench  and  the  other  two  in  the  trench  immediately 
in  the  rear.  In  case  a  trench  is  not  available,  a  rifle  pit 
can  be  used.  A  gutter,  sunken  road,  embankment  or 
hedge  can  be  used  for  this  purpose,  so  long  as  trench  fire 
is  simulated. 

The  firing  line  advances  at  a  walk  from  lOO  yards, 
takes  up  Double  Time  at  50  yards  from  trench,  fires  one 
shot  at  the  Double  Time  when  within  10  yards  of  the 
first  target,  continues  to  the  trench  and  fires  the  remain- 
ing six  shots,  automatic  fire,  at  the  two  targets  in  the 
trench  in  the  rear  of  the  first  line  target. 

140.  Score.  Seven  shots  will  constitute  a  score.  Ex- 
cept in  slow  fire  when  each  shot  will  be  marked  as  soon 
as  fired,  targets  will  be  marked  after  each  man  has  com- 
pleted a  score. 


j# 


RANGE  PRACTICE  103 

141.     THE  DISMOUNTED  COURSE  will  be: 

1  Slow    fire,    10  yards,  minimum  of  i  maximum  of  3  scores 

2  Slow    fire,    25  yards,  minimum  of  i  maximum  of  3  scores 

3  Quick  fire,   10  yards,  minimum  of  i  maximum  of  3  scores 

4  Quick   fire,  25  yards,  minimum  of  i  maximum  of  3  scores 

5  Automatic  fire,  10  yards,  minimum  of  i  maximum  of  3  scores 

6  Automatic  fire,  25  yards,  minimum  of  i  maximum  of  3  scores 

7  Trench  fire,  i  run  of  7  shots,  about  eight  men  at  a  time 


PART  III 
USE  OF  THE  RIFLE 


PART  III 
USE  OF  THE  RIFLE 

142.     GENERAL  MILITARY  VOCABULARY. 

Battle  Sight:  The  position  of  the  rear  sight  in  which 
the  leaf  is  laid  down. 

Beaten  Zone:  The  space  on  the  ground  upon  which 
the  bullets  of  the  Cone  of  Dispersion  strike. 

Bore:     The  cylindrical  cavity  in  the  small-arms  barrel. 

Butt:  The  embankment  or  other  means  used  to  stop 
bullets  in  rear  of  a  range  target.  The  plural  '"butts"  is 
used  to  designate  collectively  the  parapet,  pit  and  back 
stop  of  a  group  of  targets. 

Caliber:  The  interior  diameter  of  a  small-arms  barrel, 
measured  between  the  lands. 

Cant:  To  revolve  the  barrel  of  the  piece  on  its  axis 
to  the  right  or  left  while  aiming. 

Combined  Sights:  The  use  of  more  than  one  sight 
setting  for  dififerent  parts  of  a  firing  unit  to  increase 
the  Beaten  Zone. 

Cone  of  Dispersion  (Cone  of  Fire),  (Fig.  24a):  A 
term  applied  to  the  figure  formed  in  space  by  the  tra- 
jectories, considered  together,  of  a  series  of  shots  fired 
by  a  body  of  soldiers  at  a  common  objective  and  with 
the  same  rear  sight  setting. 

Danger  Space:     The  sum  of  the  distances  at  the  be- 

107 


io8 


MILITARY  VOCABULARY 


ginning  and  end  of  the  path  of  the  bullet  in  which  an 
object  of  given  height  will  be  struck.  Sighting  prone 
at  500  yards,  the  entire  distance  is  danger  space,  as  the 
highest  point  of  the  trajectory  is  28  inches.  At  long 
ranges  the  danger  space  at  the  farther  end  of  the  range 
alone  is  considered.     (Fig.  4.) 

Disappearing  Target:  A  target  which  is  temporarily 
exposed  to  view. 

Disk,  Marking:     A   staff,   with   a   disk   at  each  end, 


Fig.   24a. — Cone  of  Dispersion  or  Cone  of  Fire. 

used  by  the  marker  in  the  pit  in  signaling  the  results  of 
hits  on  the  target. 

Drift:  The  lateral  deviation  of  the  bullet  caused  by 
the  resistance  of  the  air  and  the  rotation  of  the  bullet 
on  its  longer  axis. 

Echelon,  Order  in:  In  the  order  in  echelon  the  tar- 
gets or  firing  stands  are  placed  one  behind  another  to 
the  right  or  left  and  unmasking  one  another. 

Emplacement:  The  space  on  the  target  range  allotted 
for  the  position  of  the  target. 

Grooves:  The  spiral  channels  within  the  bore  of  the 
rifle  barrel. 

Lands:  Spaces  in  the  bore  of  the  rifle  barrel  between 
the  grooves. 

Mirage:    A  word  used  to  designate  the  heat  waves 


MILITARY  VOCABULARY  109 

observed  on  the  target  range  on  warm  days.  The  waves 
indicate  the  direction  in  which  the  air  is  moving. 

O'clock:  A  term  employed  to  indicate  by  means  of  the 
division  on  the  dial  of  the  clock  the  location  of  hits  on 
the  target  or  the  direction  from  which  the  wind  may  be 
blowing,  as  a  7  o'clock,  4  or  5  o'clock  wind.  In  speaking 
of  the  position  of  a  hit,  the  dial  is  supposed  to  occupy 
the  front  of  the  target  facing  the  firer  with  12  at  the 
top  of  the  target.  In  speaking  of  wind,  the  dial  is  sup- 
posed to  lie  on  the  ground,  with  the  12  toward  the  target 
and  the  center  at  the  firing  point.     (Fig.  18.) 

Pit:  The  space  between  the  parapet  and  the  butt  or 
bullet  stop  occupied  by  the  markers. 

Prone:  Lying  flat  on  the  belly.  The  only  position 
with  the  body  extended  on  the  ground  authorized  in 
long  distance  firing.     (Fig.  12.) 

Ranges:    Close   Range o —  600  yards 

Effective  Range 600 — 1200      *' 

Long  Range   1200 — 2000      " 

Distant  Range .2000  yds.  and  over 

Ricochet  Shots:  Bullets  which  rebound  after  strik- 
ing the  ground. 

Score:  A  string  of  consecutive  shots  (usually  5  or 
10)  fired  in  individual  practice. 

Sighting  Shots:  The  trial  shots  which  precede  scores 
in  the  Qualification  Test  Firing  to  enable  the  soldier  to 
determine  the  proper  sight  setting  or  point  of  aim  and 
start  the  score  with  a  warm  rifle. 

Targets  (Range):  bull's-eye  target:  A  series  of 
concentric  circles  mounted  on  a  rectangle. 

bull's-eye:     The  black  circular  division  in  the  cen- 


110  MILITARY  VOCABULARY 

ter  of  the  bull's-eye  target.  Shots  in  this  space  have  a 
value  of  5  for  targets  A,  B,  and  C.  (Figs.  14,  15,  16,  17.) 

center:  The  annular  division  of  the  bull's-eye  targets 
A,  B,  and  C  embraced  between  the  bull's-eye  and  the 
circumference  of  the  next  larger  circular  division  of 
the  target.     Shots  in  this  space  have  a  value  of  4. 

inner:  The  annular  division  of  the  bull's-eye  targets 
A  and  B,  outside  the  Centen  Shots  in  this  space  have 
a  value  of  3. 

outer:  The  space  on  the  bull's-eye  targets  A  and  B, 
outside  the  Inner.    Shots  in  this  space  have  a  value  of  2. 

SILHOUETTE  TARGET:  A  black  or  drab  silhouette  rep- 
resenting a  soldier  standing,  kneeling  or  prone.  Desig- 
nated as  D,  E,  F,  G,  H,  I,  and  K. 

D :  Black  silhouette  of  Prone  Soldier  in  middle  of 
6'  X  6'  Target. 

E:     Drab  silhouette  of  Kneeling  Soldier. 

F:    Drab  silhouette  of  Prone  Soldier.    (Fig.  19a.) 

G,  H,  I  and  K  are  varied  arrangements  of  E  and  F. 

Telescopic  Sight:  A  telescope  or  other  magnifying 
device  attached  to  the  barrel  of  the  rifle,  for  getting, 
while  aiming,  a  better  definition  of  a  distant  objective, 
provision  being  made  for  adjustments  in  elevation  and 
for  windage. 

Trajectory:  The  path  described  by  a  bullet  in  the  air 
moving  under  the  combined  influences  of  the  force 
of  propulsion,  the  force  of  gravity,  and  the  resistance 
of  the  air.     (Fig.  4.) 

Twist:  The  spiral  formed  by  the  grooves  in  the 
barrel  of  a  rifled  piece.  In  both  Rifles,  Models  1903 
and  1917,  this  twist  is  uniform,  one  turn  in  10  inches. 

Windage:     The  influence  of  the  wind  in  deflecting  the 


MILITARY  VOCABULARY  iii 

bullet  from  the  point  at  which  it  is  aimed ;  also  applied 
to  the  amount  of  change  made  on  the  wind  gage. 

Wind  Gage:  A  graduated  attachment  on  the  rear 
of  the  rifle  (Model  1903)  by  which  allowance  may 
be  made  for  the  effect,  in  aiming,  of  the  wind  upon  the 
bullet,  and  for  drift. 

143.     TERRAINE  VOCABULARY. 

Cover:  A  feature  of  the  ground  affording  conceal- 
ment or  protection  from  enemy. 

Eminences:     cliff:     High  steep  rock. 
^  CREST :     Top  of  slope. 

hill:     a  medium  sized  eminence. 

KNOLL :     A  low  hill  standing  alone. 

pass:     a  gap  in  a  ridge  or  Hne  of  hills. 

ridge:     An  elevation  with  slopes  on  both  sides. 

SADDLE :    A  shallow  dip  in  a  ridge. 

spur:     a  ridge  running  out  from  a  slope. 

Land:     arable  land:     Land  under  cultivation. 

clearing:     Open  land  in  a  wood. 

fencing:     Structure  enclosing  land. 

gorge:     a  rugged  deep  ravine. 

HOLLOW :     A  depression  in  the  ground. 

marshland:  Low-lying  wet  land  at  times  covered 
with  water. 

pasture:     Grass  land. 

PLATEAU :     An  elevated  level  of  land. 

ploughed  land  : 

quarry:     a  stone  pit. 

ravine  :     A  deep  narrow  valley, 

slope:     An  incHne. 

Hollow   (concave)  slope 
Bulging  (convex)  slope 


112  MILITARY  VOCABULARY 

Gentle  slope 
Steep  slope 

Opposite  slope,  inclining  downward  toward  the  ob- 
server. 
Forward     slope,     inclining     downward     from     ob- 
server. 
Right  slope,  inclining  downward  to  the  right. 
Left  slope,  inclining  downward  to  the  left. 
Reverse  slope,  inclining  downward  to  the  rear. 
valley:     a  space  between  hills. 
Profile:     An  outHne  or  contour. 

Railroads:     bridge:     A   roadway   structure   spanning 
a  ravine,  road,  water  course,  etc. 

CUT   (or  Cutting)  :     An  excavation  for  a  railway  or 
road. 

embankment:     Earth  banked  up   for  a   railway  or 
road. 

GRADE  CROSSING :  On  the  same  level  as  roadway. 
SIGNAL  box:     a  si»all  building  on  railroad  for  sig- 
naling. •         - 

VIADUCT :     A  series  of  arches  carrying  a  roadway. 
Roads:    bridge:     (See  Railroads.) 
causeway:     a  raised  roadway': 

cross-roads:    A  point  where  one  road   crosses  an- 
other. 

cut:     (See  Railroads.) 
embankment:     (See  Railroads.) 
JUNCTION  OF  roads:     FORK — where  roads  meet  with- 
out crossing. 
path: 

SUNKEN  road:     An  excavated  roadway. 
viaduct:     (See  Railroads.) 


MILITARY  VOCABULARY  113 

Skyline:     The  line  where  earth  or  sea  appear  to  meet 
the  sky. 
Verdure:     copse  (or  Coppice)  :  a  small  wood. 
HEDGE :     A  line  of  bushes. 
SCRUB :     Small  stunted  trees  or  bushes. 
shrub:     Small  bushy  tree. 
thicket:     a  small  wood. 

UNDERGROWTH :     Bushes,  creepers,  etc.,  in  a  wood. 
Water:     brook:     A  small  stream. 
culvert:     a  covered  drain,  under  a  road. 

DRY  WATER  COURSE  : 

river:   a  large  body  of  running  water. 

STREAM :     A  small  body  of  running  water. 

144.     FIRING  VOCABULARY.     Definitions. 

Combined  Sights:  A  term  used  when  sights  are  set 
at  two  or  more  elevations  in  collective  fire.  They  are 
used  when  the  range  is  uncertain  and,  when  two  settings 
are  used,  usually  one  is  from  50,^0  100  yards  under  and 
the  other  50  to  100  yards  (5ver  the  estimated  range. 
When  three  settings  are  used,  one  is  put  at  the  estimated 
range. 

Combined  sights  are  not  used  where  the  range  is 
known  nor  usually  by  less  than  two  platoons.  They  are 
used  against  advancing  enemy,  to  cover  his  movement, 
changing  the  farthest  sighting  as  enemy  advances. 

Tire  At  Will:  That  class  of  fire  in  which,  within  the 
restriction  of  the  command  for  firing,  the  individuals 
deliver  their  fire  independently  of  the  commander  and 
of  each  other. 

Fire  Control:  Or  Conduct  of  Fire,  is  the  exercise  by 
the  commander  over  his  unit  or  units,  of  that  power 
which  enables  him  to  regulate  the  fire  in  obedience  to 


114  MILITARY  VOCABULARY 

his  will.  It  pertains  especially  to  the  technicalities  im- 
mediately involved  in  delivery  of  fire. 

Fire  Direction:  Or  Employment  of  Fire,  is  a  general 
term  embracing  the  various  steps,  including  tactical  dis- 
position, which  enable  the  commander  of  one  or  more 
units  to  bring  an  effective  fire  to  bear  upon  the  desired 
target  at  the  proper  time.  It  pertains  especially  to  prepa- 
ration of  fire. 

Fire  Discipline  is  that  condition  of  the  personnel 
of  a  fire  unit,  'resulting  from  training  and  practice,  which 
enables  the  commander  to  obtain  an  orderly  and  effi- 
cient delivery  of  fire. 

Gallery  Practice:  Short  range  firing  as  a  part  of  the 
progressive  course  between  the  position  instruction  and 
the  outdoor  range  practice.  There  is  no  advantage  in 
gallery  practice  at  more  than  one  distance.  Fifty  feet  is 
the  greatest  distance  at  which  the  firer  can  plainly  see 
the  hit  on  the  target.  The  targets  can  be  proportioned 
so  as  to  simulate  the  firing  at  any  distance. 

Rapid  Fire:  That  class  of  fire  employed  in  instruc- 
tion and  qualification  practice  in  which  a  time  limit  is 
set  for  completing  a  score  or  scores. 

Slow  Fire:  That  class  of  fire  employed  in  instruction 
and  record  practice  in  which  no  time  limit  is  imposed 
for  completing  a  score. 

145.  CLASSES  OF  FIRE  BY  RATE. 

Rapid  Fire:     lo  to  20  shots  per  minuteo 
Slow  Fire:     i  to  6  shots  per  minute. 

146.  CLASSES  OF  FIRE  BY  DIRECTION.     (Fig.  25.) 
Converging  Fire:    Fire  aimed  at  one  target  from  dif- 
ferent points. 


/yi)lnc//rect^//77ec/Jf/re 


-  -o  \\\ 


Dhinbuted   Concenf rated  fmut 
.^i::^T(Cpirect  or  fro/?^/ f/r^y^,^^^ 


Fig.   25.— Classes 


^Uha/mec/ f/re  (GjF/reofPos/fhn 

-    ^^    -  —  ^^ entrenchments  —-^^^^'"''''''^^ 


^^■::^r.^-.-;-v,«vi__   — tj=^^^^(j*/jRever:3e  //re 


ire  by  Direction. 


MILITARY  VOCABULARY  •  115 

Enfilade  Fire:  Fire  which  sweeps  a  line  of  troops  or 
defenses  from  a  flank. 

Frontal  Fire:  Fire  which  is  delivered  directly  to  the 
front. 

Grazing^  Fire:  When  the  angle  of  the  fall  of  the  bul- 
lets (see  Trajectory)  is  the  same  as  the  slope  of  the 
ground  and  the  missiles  sweep  along  its  surface,  the  fire 
is  called  Grazing. 

Indirect  Fire:  Indirect  fire  is  fire  directed  by  means 
of  auxiliary  aiming-marks  at  an  objective  which  is  in- 
visible to  the  firer. 

Masked  Fire:  Troops  (guns  or  rifles)  in  a  position 
whence  they  could  employ  fire  effectively  against  an 
enemy,  but  for  the  fear  of  causing  casualties  to  their 
comrades,  are  said  to  have  their  fire  masked  by  these 
latter  troops. 

Oblique  Fire:  Fire  directed  on  a  target  in  a  slanting 
direction,  i.  e.  not  directly  to  the  front. 

Keverse  Fire :  Fire  so  directed  that  the  bullets  strike 
the  target  in  rear. 

147.     CLASSES  OF  FIRE  BY  RESULT. 
Collective  Fire:     The  fire  of  several  rifles  combined 
for  a  definite  purpose  under  the  orders  of  a  fire-leader. 
Such    fire    skillfully   directed   and    well    controlled    may 
produce  good  effect  up  to  1400  yards. 

Concentrated  Fire:  Fire  of  a  unit  concentrated  on 
a  point  of  the  target,  such  as  the  position  of  a  machine 
gun. 

(i)   Used  for  observation. 

(2)   Used   for  local  effect  on  a  particular  part  of 
the  enemy's  line. 
Fire  of  Position:     Infantry  is  said  to  execute  Fire  of 


ii6  .  MILITARY  VOCABULARY 

Position  when  it  is  posted  so  as  to  assist  in  an  attack 
by  firing  over  the  heads  or  off  the  flank  of  the  attacking 
troops  and  is  not  itself  to  engage  in  the  advance,  or  when, 
in  defense,  it  is  simiHarly  posted  to  augment  the  fire  of 
the  main  firing  line. 

Individual  Fire:  Fire  opened  without  orders  from 
a  fire-leader.  On  account  of  the  difficulty  of  observa- 
tion, 600  yards  may  be  taken  as  the  limit  of  effective 
fire  of  this  nature  against  small  targets. 

Mutual  Supporting  Fire  is  the  supporting  fire  of  units 
advancing  alternately  by  rushes. 

The  supporting  unit  must  avoid  endangering  the  unit 
being  supported  and  not  delay  its  own  advance,  as  ad- 
vancing is  usually  the  best  means  of  support. 

Pursuing  Fire:     At  a  receding  enemy. 

Searching  Fire  is  the  term  applied  to  collective  fire 
when  the  depth  of  its  dispersion  over  a  beaten  zone  is  in- 
creased by  the  use  of  combined  sights. 

Sweeping  Fire  is  fire  distributed  laterally. 

Surprise  Fire:     Unexpected  and  demoralizing. 

Surprise  fire,  consisting  of  Bursts  of  Fire  instead  of 
continuous  fire,  is  often  used  to  demoralize  the  enemy. 


CHAPTER  I 
LOADING  AND  FIRING  COMMANDS 

148.  TO  LOAD.  i.  With  dummy  (blank  or  ball) 
cartridges;  2.  Load. 

Note.  Loadings  are  executed  in  line  and  skjrmish  line 
only. 

Pieces  having  been  ordered  loaded  are  kept  loaded 
without  command,  until  the  command  Unload  or  Inspec- 
tion Arms. 

If  the  men  are  not  already  in  the  Position  of  Load, 
that  position  is  taken  at  the  announcement  of  the  sight 
setting;  if  the  announcement  is  omitted,  the  position  is 
taken  at  the  first  command  for  firing. 

149.  TO  UNLOAD.     Unload. 

Note.  At  the  command  Unload,  the  sight  leaf  is  laid 
down  and  in  Model  1903  the  drift  slide  is  brought  back 
to  normal. 

150.  TO  SET  THE  SIGHT.  Range,  Eleven  Hundred 
(850,  etc.) 

or 
Battle  Sight. 

Note.  If  no  sight  setting  is  announced,  the  Battle 
Sight  will  be  used. 

151.  FIRING  COMMANDS. 

(i)  To  Fire  by  Volley:  i.  Ready;  2.  Aim;  3.  Com- 
pany (Platoon  or  section) ;  4.  Fire. 

117 


ii8  LOADING  AND  FIRING  COMMANDS 

Note.     The  command  Load  should  precede  volley  fir- 
ing.   After  first  volley  soldiers  reload  without  command. 
To    Continue    the   Firing:      i.  Aim;    2.  Company;    3. 
Fire. 

(2)  To  Fire  at  Will:  Fire  at  WilL 

Note.  That  class  of  fire  normally  employed  in  attack 
or  defense.  It  is  often  advisable  to  give  the  number 
of  rounds  to  be  fired  before  giving  the  command. 

To  increase  {and  decrease)  the  Rate  of  Fire:  Faster 
(Slower). 

(3)  To  Fire  by  Clip :   Clip  Fire. 

Note.  Executed  in  the  same  manner  as  Fire  at  Will 
except  that  each  man,  after  having  exhausted  the  cart- 
ridges then  in  the  rifle,  suspends  firing. 

Clip  fire  has  limited  application.     It  is  principally  used 

(a)  In  the  early  stage  of  the  combat,  to  steady  the 
men  by  habituating  them  to  brief  pauses  in  firing. 

(b)  To  produce  a  short  burst  of  fire. 

(4)  To  Suspend  Firing:  Suspend  Firing,  or  a  long 
blast  of  the  whistle. 

Note.  Firing  stops ;  pieces  are  held,  loaded  and  locked, 
in  a  position  of  readiness  for  instant  resumption  of  firing, 
rear  sights  unchanged.  The  men  continue  to  observe  the 
target  or  aiming  place,  or  the  place  at  which  the  target 
disappeared  or  at  which  it  is  expected  to  reappear. 

(5)  To  Cease  Firing:     Cease  Firing. 

Note.  Firing  stops ;  pieces  not  already  there  are 
brought  to  the  Position  of  Load;  those  not  loaded,  are 
loaded;  sights  are  laid  down,  pieces  are  locked  and 
brought  to  the  Order. 

Cease  Firing  is  used  for  long  pauses,  to  prepare  for 
changes  of  position,  or  to  steady  the  men. 


LOADING  AND  FIRING  COMMANDS  119 

Commands  for  suspending  or  ceasing  fire  may  be  given 
at  any  time  after  the  preparatory  command  for  firing, 
whether  the  firing  has  actually  commenced  or  not.  A 
long  blast  of  the  whistle  (as  for  Suspend  Firing)  may 
be  used  as  a  preliminary  to  Cease  Firing. 

(6)  Complete  Firing  Command.  The  following  is  an 
example  of  one  form  of  a  complete  firing  command,  in- 
cluding Target  Designation. 

Range,  1100;  Reference  Point,  that  clump  of  trees  on 
hill-crest;  Target,  at  4  o'clock,  2  sights,  a  gun  pit;  Fire 
at  Will. 

152.     FIRING  COMMANDS  BY  ARM  SIGNALS. 

Range:  To  announce  range,  extend  the  arm  toward 
the  leaders  or  men  for  whom  the  signal  is  intended,  fist 
closed;  by  keeping  the  fist  closed,  Battle  Sight  is  indi- 
cated ;  by  opening  and  closing  the  fist,  expose  thumb  and 
fingers  to  a  number  equal  to  the  hundreds  of  yards;  to 
add  50  yards  describe  a  short  horizontal  line  with  fore- 
finger. 

To  change  Elevation,  indicate  the  amount  of  increase 
or  decrease  by  fingers  as  above ;  point  upward  to  indi- 
cate increase  and  downward  to  indicate  decrease. 

What  range  Kre  you  using?  or  What  is  the  range? 
Extend  the  arms  toward  the  person  addressed,  one  hand 
open,  palm  to  the  front,  resting  on  the  other  hand,  fist 
closed. 

Are  you  ready?  or  I  am  ready:  Raise  the  hand,  fin- 
gers extended  and  joined,  palm  toward  the  person  ad- 
dressed. 

Commence  Firing:  Move  the  arm  extended  in  full 
length,  hand  palm  down,  several  times  through  a  hori- 


120  LOADING  AND  FIRING  COMMANDS 

zontal  arc  in  front  of  the  body.  This  command  by  hand 
or  bugle  is  equivalent  to  Fire  at  Will. 

Fire  Faster:  Execute  rapidly  the  signal  Commence 
Firing. 

Fire  Slower:  Execute  slowly  the  signal  Commence 
Firing. 

To  swing  the  cone  of  fire  to  the  right  or  left:  Ex- 
tend the  arm  in  full  length  to  the  front,  palm  to  the  right 
(left)  ;  swing  the  arm  to  the  right  (left)  and  point 
in  the  direction  of  the  new  target. 

Fix  Bayonet:  Simulate  the  movement  of  the  right 
hand  in  Fix  Bayonet. 

Suspend  Firing:  Raise  and  hold  the  forearm  steadily 
in  a  horizontal  position  in  front  of  the  forehead,  palm 
of  the  hand  to  the  front. 

Cease  Firing:  Raise  the  forearm  as  in  Suspend  Firing 
and  swing  it  up  and  down  several  times  in  front  of  the 
face. 

Platoon:  Extend  the  arm  horizontally  toward  the 
platoon  leader ;  describe  small  circles  with  the  hand. 

Squad:  Extend  the  arm  horizontally  toward  the  pla- 
toon leader ;  swing  the  hand  up  and  down  from  the  wrist. 

Rush  (Same  as  Double  Time)  :  Carry  the  hand  to 
the  shoulder ;  rapidly  thrust  the  hand  upward  the  full 
extent  of  the  arm  several  times. 

The  signals  Platoon  and  Squad  are  intended  pri- 
marily for  communication  between  the  captain  and  his 
platoon  leaders.  The  signal  Platoon  or  Squad  indicates 
that  the  Platoon  Commander  is  to  cause  the  signal  which 
follows  to  be  executed  by  platoons  or  squad. 


CHAPTER  II 

ESTIMATING  DISTANCE 

153.  BY  THE  EYE.  (i)  Measure  the  intervening 
ground  with  the  eye  in  terms  of  some  familiar  unit,  such 
as  lOO  yards. 

(2)  The  soldier  can  decide  that  the  object  cannot  be 
more  than  a  certain  distance  away,  nor  less  than  a  cer- 
tain distance ;  his  estimates  must  be  kept  within  the  clos- 
est possible  limits  and  the  mean  distance  of  the  two 
taken  as  the  range. 

In  the  Field,  two  men  in  each  platoon,  who  have  been 
found  especially  accurate,  make  maximum  and  minimum 
estimates.  Individual  estimates  are  supposed  not  to  oc- 
cupy over  30  seconds.  Platoon  leaders  transmit  the 
average  of  these  estimates  to  the  ist  Sergeant,  who  trans- 
mits the  grand  average  to  the  Captain. 

In  attack  where  the  firing  position  is  changed,  the  com- 
mander of  the  first  unit  to  establish  a  new  position  is 
responsible  for  establishing  the  new  range  when  there  are 
no  range  cards  (which  is  done  by  counting  the  paces 
covered  by  the  rush,  or  making  new  estimates  of  the 
distance  to  the  enemy)  and  transmitting  this  information 
to  the  other  units  as  they  arrive  on  the  new  line. 

(3)  Judge  by  apparent  size  of  object;  i.  e.  the  com- 
parative height  of  a  man. 

I2Z 


122  ESTIMATING  DISTANCE 

(4)   Judge  by  visibility  conditions. 

Note.     Underestimate  rather  than  overestimate. 

When  a  target  is  indistinct,  distance  is  apt  to  be  over- 
estimated. 

.   When  a  target  is  distinct,  distance  is  apt  to  be  under- 
estimated. 

Objects  seem  farther: 

(a)  When  objects  are  of  the  same  color  or  when  color 
harmonizes  with  background ; 

(b)  On  broken  ground ; 

(c)  When  seen  across  a  valley  or  undulating  ground; 

(d)  In  avenues,  long  streets  or  ravines; 

(e)  When  in  shadow; 

(f)  When  viewed  in  mist  or  failing  light; 

(g)  When  heat  is  rising  from  the  ground ; 

(h)  When  seen  near  any  other  object  which  makes 
it  appear  smaller  than  it  is  by  the  effect  of  comparison ; 

(i)  When  only  partially  seen,  as  in  the  case  of  troops 
firing  from  cover ; 

(j)  Troops  kneeling  or  lying  in  the  open  seem  farther 
away  than  when  standing; 

(k)  When  looking  from  low  ground  up  towards  high- 
er ground. 

Objects  seetn  nearer: 

(a)  When  both  object  and  background  are  of  differ- 
ent or  contrasting  colors ; 

(b)  When  the  sun  is  behind  the  observer; 

(c)  In  bright  light  or   clear  atmosphere; 

(d)  When  the  intervening  ground  is  level  or  covered 
with  snow ; 

(e)  When  seen  across  water  or  a  deep  chasm; 

(f)  When  looking  downwards; 


ESTIMATING  DISTANCE 


123 


(g)  When  the  object  is  large,  or  when  seen  near  any 
other  object  which  makes  it  appear  larger  than  it  is  by 
effect  of  comparison. 

Note,    As  bright  light  makes  objects  seem  nearer  than 


SOO  yds-^^-^-J 


^'^—600yJs. 


Fig.   2(i. — Front  Sight  Method  for  Estimating  Ranges. 
Rifle,   Model    1903. 


they  really  are,  and  dull  light,  farther,  a  convenient  gen- 
eral rule  is 

"Lights  up,''  '^Sights  up.'' 

''Lights  down,"     "Sights  down." 


124 


ESTIMATING  DISTANCE 


154.     BY  FRONT  SIGHT  METHOD. 

In  the  Position  of  Aim,  observe  how  many  times  the 
height  of  the  front  sight  a  standing  soldier  appears  to 


i- -/500  yds, 


-SOOydsr—/ 
-JOOOyds"-^ 


Fig.  26a. — Front  Sight  Method  for  Estimating   Ranges. 
Rifle,    Model    19 17. 


ESTIMATING  DISTANCE  125 

be,    at   the    distance    which    it   is    desired    to    estimate. 

For  Model  1903:     (Fig.  26.) 

When  he  appears  1/4  times  the  height  of  front  sight, 
he  is  distant  about  1200  yards; 

When  yi  the  height,  distant  about  900  yards; 

When  y2     "         "  "  ''      600      " 

When  just  "         ''  "  "      300      '' 

Note.  This  is  calculated  for  the  Rifle  Model  ipoj  with 
a  distance  from  eye  to  front  sight  of  about  34!/^",  height 
of  front  sight  of  7/32'',  and  height  over  all  of  man,  5 
ft.  9  inches. 

For  Model  1917:    (Fig.  26a.) 

When  Ys  the  height,  distant  about  1500  yards. 
When  y2     "         "  "  "      1000       " 

When  %     "         "  "  "        666       " 

When  just  "         "  "  "        500       " 

Note.  Distance  from  the  eye  to  the  front  sight  36^^^', 
the  height  of  front  sight  .14'',  and  the  height  of  a  man, 
5'  9"  over  all. 

For  a  different  height  of  front  sight,  or  distance  be- 
tween the  front  sight  and  the  eye,  make  new  proportions 
from  above  data. 

155.  BY  RESULTS  OF  FIRE.  Two  volleys,  using 
combined  sights,  should  be  sufficient  to  establish  the 
range. 

Where  1/3  of  the  shots  in  a  Cone  of  Fire  strike  in 
front  of  the  target,  the  range  is  approximately  correct. 
(Fig.  24a.) 

Nearest  shots  will  be  most  easily  mistaken  for  nucleus. 

All  shots  will  appear  to  observer  to  strike  nearer  than 
they  are. 


126 


ESTIMATING  DISTANCE 


156.     BY  RANGE  CAEDS. 

(i)  lor  Attack  (Fig.  27). 
(2)  For  Defense  (Fig.  28). 


500 


Enemy's  Position 
(2000) 


,..  Line  of  Poplars 
(1500) 


900 


Farm  Souse  (1100) 


1400 


Gate  in  hedge 
(600) 


2000 


Cross  roads  (0) 


Fig.   2y. — Range-Card   for  Attack. 

Note. — The  distances  on  the  left  are  those  from  the  enemy's  position. 
Those  on  the  right  in  parentheses  are  only  for  the  range-taker's  informa- 
tion,  and  should   not  be  shown  on  the  card,   to  avoid  confusion. 


157.  BY  MARKING  RANGES.  Roman  numerals  for 
hundreds  of  yards  are  used. 

Marks  should  be  visible  only  to  the  defense  and  one 
foot  in  height  for  each  lOO  yards  of  range,  and  are 
placed : 

(i)  ON  GROUND  (such  as  on  banks). 

(2)  ON   TREES. 

(3)  ON   BUILDINGS. 


ESTIMATING  DISTANCE 


127 


Wood       <*^<i:«^^* 

(1250)  **^f^o.ft^<^ 


Gate 
700 


Bridge  (1400J 


\N 


'hutch/noOOj 


// 


Trees  850 


Fig.  28. — Range-Card    for    Defense. 

Note. — The    point    from    which    ranges    are    taken    (A)    should    always   be 
described  clearly  on  the  card  to  facilitate  setting  it. 


158.  BY  THE  MIL  SYSTEM.  The  true  Mil  is  an  an- 
gular measurement  (3'  26.2'')  whose  natural  tangent  is 
i/iooo  of  the  radius;  but,  for  the  sake  of  convenience, 
the  Mil  is  commonly  taken  as  1/6400  of  a  circle. 

The  Mil  Scale.  (Fig.  29.)  A  mil  scale  may  be  made 
by  marking  inches  on  a  pencil,  stick  or  piece  of  card- 
board, and  dividing  the  inches  into  tenths.  An  inch  on 
a  mil  scale,  when  held  20  inches  from  the  eye,  equals  50 
mils  and  covers  1/20  of  the  range,  or, 

50  yards  at  1000  yards. 
25  yards  at  500  yards. 
20  yards  at    400  yards,  etc. 


128  ESTIMATING  DISTANCE 

A  string  20  inches  long,  with  one  end  fastened  to  the 
center  of  the  scale  and  the  other  end  held  in  the  teeth, 
is  convenient  for  obtaining  the  distance  of  20  inches 
from  the  eye. 


ii'ii{iiii|  iiii{iiii|  II  ii|iiii|iiii{iiii|  iiii|iiii|iiii{ 


1 1 1 1 1 1 1 II 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 II 

•J  inch 
0  50  100  1^  200  250  300 


Mil   Scale. 


Divided    into    inches    and    tenths   of   inches    with    a    string   20    inches    long 
fastened   at   the   center. 


The  Ordnance  Department  issues  a  combination  Mil 
Rule  and  Auxiliary  Rear-sight  Scale  in  the  form  of  a 
Musketry  Rule,  with  which  an  angle  may  be  measured 
in  mils  or  in  terms  of  the  scale  on  the  rifle  sight.  The 
rule  is  of  aluminum,  4^  inches  x  1^4  inches,  marked  for 
300  mils  and  has  the  formulas  given  in  this  section  on 
the  back. 

To  Find  the  Range  by  the  Mil  System. 

FORMULA  : 

(Width  or  height  in  yds.)  XlOOO 

R  (Range  in  yds.)=W 

M  (number  of  Mils) 

example:  a  house  is  estimated  to  be  30  ft.,  or  10  yds., 
long,  (judging  from  the  size  of  the  door  and  windows,) 
and  extends  25  mils  on  the  Mil  Scale  (when  held  20 
inches  from  the  eye)  ;  then, 


ESTIMATING  DISTANCE  129 


10  yards   X    1000     _^^  y^.js 


^~^         25  Mils  ^'''*  "Range"  of  the  house) 

To  Find  the  Width  by  the  Mil  System:  The  Mil  Sys- 
tem can  also  be  used  for  estimating  width,  the  range 
being  known,  by  the  formula 

RXM 

W= =width   or  height   in   yards. 

1000 

Assume  a  stone  wall  at  a  known  range  of  1200  yards 
which  covers  80  mils  on  the  scale.  How  long  is  the  wall 
and  how  many  men  are  behind  it,  if  at  one  yard  intervals  ? 

1200  yards  X  80  Mils 

W=- =^96  yards  or  96  men. 

1000 

To  Find  the  Number  of  Mils  to  cover  a  given  front,  the 

width  being  known,  use  the  formula 

WXiooo 

M= 

R 

Assume  a  line  of  skirmishers  containing  200  men  at  i 
yard  intervals,  a  portion  of  the  line  only  being  visible 
at  a  Range  of  800  yards.  How  wide  a  front  in  Mils 
do  they  occupy? 


130 


ESTIMATING  DISTANCE 


200  yards  X  looo 

M=i —250  Mils. 

800 

Common  Unit  of  Measure.  (Fig.  29a.)  One  inch  on 
the  Mil  scale,  held  20"  from  the  eye,  or  i  sight  leaf 
at  13M''  from  the  eye,  or  i  Finger  Breadth  at  the  proper 
predetermined   distance    from   the   eye,   each   covers   50 


{f J^OO  yards — 


syE'^* 


Fig.   29a. — Units    of    Measure. 


mils  on  the  landscape,  which  width  is  equal  to  1/20  of 
the  range  at  all  ranges,  for  example,  at  1000  yards  it 
equals  50  yards.  For  convenience  and  accuracy  (as  the 
soldier  always  has  his  rifle)  the  rear  sight  is  usually  used 
except  in  cases  of  emergency.  Measures  in  Mils  should 
always  be  translated  into  ''Sights"  before  being  given  to 
the  soldier. 


CHAPTER  III 

DESIGNATION   AND    RECOGNITION   OF 
TARGETS 


Among  the  systems  used  for  designating  targets  are 
the  following : 

159.  FEATURE-OF-GROUND  SYSTEM.  By  the  Fea- 
ture System,  in  designating  a  target  (which  is  often  a 
minor  feature  of  the  landscape),  the  description  should 


Fig.   30. — Feature  of  Ground   System. 

Example    A.      Range,    950;    Reference    Point,    Red    Barn;    Target,    Gate    in 
Wall    (Ti),   at   Right   of   Barn. 

Example   B,      Range,   925;    Reference   Point,    Red   Barn;   Target,   Tree    (T2) 
at   Left   of   Barn. 


132     TARGET  DESIGNATION  AND  RECOGNITION 


begin  with  the  principal  point,  named  the  "Reference 
Point/'  from  which  the  target  is  located.  (Fig.  30).  All 
these  descriptions  precede  the  firing  commands. 

160.  HORIZONTAL  CLOCK-FACE  SYSTEM  (or  H.  C. 
F.).  (Fig.  31.)  Imagine  a  clock  face  lying  horizontal 
with  its  center  at  the  firing  point,  and  12  o'clock  directly 
to  the  front. 

161.  VERTICAL  CLOCK-FACE  SYSTEM  (or  V.  C. 
F.).  (Fig.  32.)  Imagine  a  clock  face  hanging  vertically 
with  its  face  at  right  angles  to  the  line  of  vision,  and  its 


Fig.   31. — Horizontal  Clock  Face  System. 

Example  A.     Range,   800;   Target,   at    11   o'clock,  a  Trench   (Ti). 

Example   B,      Range,    1050;    Target,    at    i    o'clock,    a    House    (T2). 


TARGET  DESIGNATION  AND  RECOGNITION      133 


center   at   the   reference   point.      An   objective    directly 
above  the  reference  point  would  be  at  12  o'clock,  etc. 


t^m-P- 


Fig.   32. — Vertical  Clock  Face  System. 
Example  A.     Range,    11 00;    Reference   Point,    Bridge;   Target,   at  4  o'clock, 

Wall  at  Fork  of  Roads  (Ti). 
Example  B.     Range,    1400;    Reference  Point,    Bridge;    Target,   at   9  o'clock, 

Battery  at   Left  of  House    (T2). 


134 


TARGET  DESIGNATION  AND  RECOGNITION 


162.  MIL  (SIGHT  OR  FINGER)  SYSTEM.  Dis- 
tances in  the  landscape  in  any  direction  from  the  Refer- 
ence Point,  also  the  width  of  the  target  may  be  desig- 
nated 


Bs  Ts 


Fig.   33. — Mil    System. 

Example    A.      Range,     1200;    Reference    Point,    Cross    Road    (Ri) ;    Target, 

150  Mils,  left,  a  Thicket   (Ti). 
Example    B.      Range,    1050;    Reference    Point,    Cross    Road    (Ri);    Target, 

100  Mils,   right,   a  Battery    (T2). 
Example    C.      Range,    975;    Reference    Point,    Bottom    of    Tree    on    Ridge 

(R2);   Target,    100   Mils,    below,    a   Shell    Hole    (T3). 


(a)  By  Mils.     (Fig.  33.) 

(b)  By  Sights.     (Fig.  33a) 

(c)  By  Finger  Widths.     (Fig.  33a.) 

By  Sight  System.  (S.S.)  The  soldier  marks  a  point 
on  the  stock  of  his  rifle  13^'^  from  the  rear  sight  (as- 
suming the  rear  sight  leaf  is  11/16''  wide,  which  is  the 
case  on  both  the  Model  1903  and  Model  1917).     With 


TARGET  DESIGNATION  AND  RECOGNITION     135 

his  eye  above  this  point,  the  width  of  the  rear  sight 
(called  a  "Sight")  then  covers  50  mils  of  the  landscape. 
(Fig.  33a.)  This  is  the  most  practical  and  convenient 
system  for  the  enlisted  man  and  should  alv^ays  be  used 
except  in  an  emergency. 


R2TS 


Fig.    33a. 

Example  A.  Range,  1300;  Reference  Point,  at  12  o'clock,  Cross  Roads 
(Ri);  Target,  10  o'clock,  2  Sights,  is  the  left  of  an  enemy's  line, 
I    Sight  long    (Ti). 

Example  B.  Range,  1050;  Reference  Point,  at  12  o'clock,  Cross  Roads 
(Ri);    Target,    at    3    o'clock,    2    Fingers,    a    Battery    (T2). 

Example  C.  Range,  1000;  Reference  Point  at  10.30  o'clock,  bottom  of 
tree  on  ridge  (R2)  ;  Target,  at  6  o'clock,  2  Fingers,  a  Shell  Hole  (T3). 


By  Finger  Width  System.  As  a  substitute  for  Mils 
or  Sight  widths,  the  Finger  may  be  used,  held  in  front 
of  the  eye  at  such  a  distance  that  the  width  of  one 
Finger  covers  the  same  amount  of  landscape  as  the 
width  of  50  Mils  or  one  Sight.  (See  Common  Unit  of 
Measure,  Section  158.)  To  make  this  method  effective,  the 


136     TARGET  DESIGNATION  AND  RECOGNITION 

soldier  should  find  a  means  of  always  placing  the  finger 
at  the  same  distance  from  the  eye,  which  must  be  pre- 
determined by  experiment.     (Fig.  33a.) 

Note.  Similarly,  anything,  such  as  a  whistle,  held  in 
like  manner  at  a  predetermined  distance  from  the  eye, 
may  be  used  as  equivalent  for  determining  Mils  or  sight 
widths  on  the  landscape.  The  whistle  chain  or  cord  can 
be  adjusted  to  give  the  proper  distance. 

163.  COMBINED  SYSTEMS.  The  above  systems 
are  often  combined. 

example:  Range,  1100;  Reference  Point,  that  clump 
of  trees  on  hill  crest;  Target,  at  4  o'clock,  2  Sights,  a 
gun  pit. 

164.  AUXILIARY  AIMING  POINT.  (Fig.  34.)  "If 
the  target  cannot  be  seen  with  the  naked  eye,  platoon 
leaders  select  an  object  in  front  of  or  behind  it,  designate 
this  as  the  aiming  point,  and  direct  a  sight  setting  which 
will  carry  the  cone  of  fire  into  the  target."  (I.  D.  R.) 

Note.  To  determine  the  elevation  to  use  with  the 
Auxiliary  Aim  Point  in  order  to  reach  the  real  target, 
when  the  range  of  the  real  target  is  known : 

With  the  Model  1903,  hold  an  inverted  rear  sight, 
22ys''  from  the  eye  ^-^  and  with  the  Model  1917,  32>4" 
from  the  eye  (which  is  the  sight  base  length,  or  the 
distance  between  the  front  and  rear  sights),  and  at 
a  distance  from  the  ground  at  which  the  rifle  will  be  held 
when  firing;  then  with  the  drift  slide,  set  at  the  known 
range  of  the  target  and  the  sight  notch  or  peep  hole 
held  on  a  line  between  the  eye  and  the  target,  note  the 

*  The  distance,  22^",  from  the  rear  sight  is  a  point  about 
lys"  back  of  the  heel  of  the  butt  on  the  Model  1903. 


TARGET  DESIGNATION  AND  RECOGNITION     137 


elevation  reading,  at  which  a  line  from  the  eye  to  the 
auxiliary  aiming  point  passes  the  rear  sight  leaf.  This 
reading  is  the  proper  elevation  at  which  the  sights  should 


x.^V;5-^T;m® 


Fig.   34. — Auxiliary   Aiming   Point    System. 

Example.      (Note  the  inverted  rear  sight.) 

T   is    target    (not    easily    seen    without   field    glasses)    at    known    distance    of 

1 100  yards, 
A  is  a  large   rock  to   be  used  as  the   Auxiliary   Aiming  Point. 
The    Auxiliary    Aiming    Point   is    announced    as    the    target    with    range    of 

1400  yards. 
This  will  bring  the  Cone  of  Dispersion  to  the  actual  unseen  Target. 


138     TARGET  DESIGNATION  AND  RECOGNITION 


Fig.   35. — Study   and    Description   of   Ground. 


A.  Skyline. 

B.  Hollow. 


C.  Gentle  slope. 

D.  Steep  slope. 


E.  Dense  cover. 

F.  Crest  of  hill. 


be  set  to  carry  the  cone  of  fire  into  the  target  when  aim- 
ing at  the  auxihary 'aiming  point. 
'      The  Musketry  Rule  (Sec.  158)  is  convenient  for  this 
purpose. 

165.     INSTRUCTION  PRACTICE. 

Note.      A    progressively    shortened    time    allowance 


TARGET  DESIGNATION  AND  RECOGNITION      139 

should  be  given  for  practice  under  the  following  instruc- 
tion as  facility  increases. 

•(i)  Study  and  Description  of  Ground.     (See  Fig.  35.) 

(a)  Foreground,  Middle  Distance  and  Back-Ground; 

(b)  Principal  features  accurately  and  briefly  described 
as  per  military  vocabulary  just  preceding; 

(c)  Minor  features  near  some  principal  feature. 

(2)  Marking  Douti  Enenl3^ 

(a)  Close  range  by  individual  soldiers. 

(b)  Long  range  by  Fire  Unit  Commanders. 

(3)  Discernment  and  Description  of  Targets. 

(a)  State  the  clear  and  unmistakable  feature  of  the 
landscape  that  is  nearest  the  target; 

(b)  Then  nearer  features  with  direction  from  first 
feature.  Allow  plenty  of  time  after  mentioning  each 
feature  before  stating  the  next. 

Note.  In  firing  commands,  the  target  description  is 
preceded  by  the  designation  of  the  range  in  yards,  upon 
hearing  which  the  soldiers  are  expected  to  adjust  their 
sights.  It  is  of  the  utmost  importance  that  ample  time 
be  given  for  this  purpose,  before  starting  to  designate 
the  target.    Failure  to  do  this  is  likely  to  result  in — 

(a)  The  soldier  not  follozving  the  description. 

(b)  Forgetting  part  of  description  while  adjusting 
sights, 

(c)  Losing  target  and  failing  to  find  it  again. 


CHAPTER  IV 
FIRE  DIRECTION  AND  CONTROL 

166.  THE  IMPORTANT  ELEMENTS  AEE: 

(a)  Good  indication  of  Targets  (clear,  concise,  de- 
liberate). 

(b)  Immediate  and  accurate  recognition  of  Targets. 

(c)  Prompt  and  efficient  placing  of  fire. 

Note.  The  soldiers  must  be  instructed  that  unless  they 
clearly  recognize  the  target  described,  they  must  remain 
at  Ready.  This  avoids  waste  of  fire  and  shows  the  fire 
unit  commander  if  he  has  not  been  understood. 

Remember  that  however  skillful  individual  men  may 
he  as  marksmen,  the  greatest  effect  is  produced  by  their 
fire  only  when  it  is  eMciently  directed  and  controlled. 

167.  DUTIES  OF  FIRE  COMMANDER  OR  PLATOON 
LEADER.  Fire  is  directed  by  a  Fire  Commander  (usually 
commissioned  officer)  who 

1.  Executes  orders  and  in  lieu  of  orders  handles  his 
unit  effectively,  and  with  proper  consideration  for  its 
safety. 

2.  Allots  Sectors. 

3.  Repeats,  or  determines  and  directs,  sight  settings. 
(See  note  below.) 

4.  Designates  target.  When  necessary,  selects  an 
Auxiliary  Aiming  Point  with  special  sight  setting  for 
same. 

140 


FIRE  DIRECTION  AND  CONTROL  141 

EXAMPLE  of  target  designation  with  complete  firing 
command,  using  combined  Vertical  Clock  Face  and  Sight 
Systems : 

Range,  iioo;  Reference  Point,  that  clump  of  trees  on 
hillside;  Target,  at  4  o'clock,  2  Sights,  a  gun  pit;  Fire 
at  will. 

5.  Arranges  for  ammunition  distribution  from  rear 
and  collection  from  dead  and  wounded. 

6.  Gives  class  of  Hre  and  controls  rate  of  lire  with  re- 
gard to  the  importance  and  distinctness  of  target  and 
the  covering  of  rushes  of  adjacent  units. 

7.  If  his  unit  is  on  a  flank,  he  sends  out,  or  arranges 
for  keeping  in  touch  with,  combat  patrols. 

8.  Signals  readiness  to  open  fire  (see  Firing  Com- 
mands by  Arm  Signals,  "I  am  ready"). 

9.  Resignals  superior's  orders  to  commence  firing. 

10.  Observes  enemy  and  results  of  fire. 

11.  Details  special  observers  to  watch  enemy  when  not 
firing. 

12.  Sees  that  iire  is  not  interfered  with  while: — 

(a)  Ammunition  is  given  out. 

(b)  Changing  sightings. 

(c)  Getting  ready  to  advance. 

(d)  Fixing  bayonets. 

13.  Provides  that  adjoining  fire  shall  not  threaten  an 
advancing  unit. 

14.  Notes  the  meaning  of  flag  and  semaphore  signals. 

15.  When  his  unit  leads  in  a  rush,  chooses  point  of 
halt  with  reference  to  a  tiew  firing  position. 

16.  Starts  rush  and  upon  halting  opens  fire  promptly. 

17.  Reorganizes  squads,  appointing  leaders,  etc.,  when 
necessary 


142  FIRE  DIRECTION  AND  CONTROL 

1 8.  When  coming  up  with  reinforcements,  is  ready  to 
take  command  of  the  unit  he  joins,  if  necessary. 

19.  Leads  in  advancing  and  charging,  and  when  in 
'Thin  lines,''  leads  the  odd  numbered  line. 

Note.    Combined  sights  are  used — 

(i.)   In  estimating  distance  by  results  of  fire. 

(2.)   To  overcome  error  in  estimating  distance. 

(3.)  Against  advancing  enemy,  to  keep  him  covered  as 
he  advances,  changing  farthest  sighting  at  the  necessary 
intervals.  At  over  1000  yards  the  probable  error  in  esti- 
mating range  is  such  that  a  single  sighting  will  probably 
prove   ineffective. 

Combined  sights  will  not  usually  be  employed  by  less 
than  two  platoons. 

168.  DUTIES  OF  A  PLATOON  GUIDE. 

1.  He  acts  as  assistant  to  the  Fire  Commander  (Pla- 
toon Leader)  and  takes  his  place  or  the  place  of  disabled 
sergeants  when  necessary. 

2.  When  he  teazles  his  position  for  any  cause,  he  noti- 
fies the  senior  corporal.  He  watches  the  firing  line  and 
adjoining  units. 

3.  He  preserves  iire  discipline  and  prevents  men  from 
leaving  the  ranks  for  any  reason. 

4.  He  assists  in  the  advance  and  leads  the  even  num- 
bered lines  in  "Advancing  by  thin  lines.'' 

5.  He  must  understand  all  signals  and  the  semaphore 
code. 

169.  DUTIES  OF  FIEE  UNIT  COMMANDER  OR 
CORPORAL. 

Fire  is  controlled  by  a  Fire  Unit  Commander  who 
I.  Receives  his  orders  from  the  Platoon  Leader  and 
sees  that  all  orders  are  promptly  passed  and  carried  out. 


FIRE  DIRECTION  AND  CONTROL  143 

2.  Indicates  the  target  and  the  portion  to  be  fired  on, 
by  his  squad,  and  sees  that  the  squad  fires  not  only  on 
the  designated  target,  but  on  all  portions  of  it  equally. 

3.  Announces  sight  setting  and  supervises  same. 

4.  Announces  class  and  rate  of  fire,  sees  that  the  same 
is  maintained,  especially  during  changing  of  sights,  prep- 
aration for  rushes,  distribution  of  aminunition,  etc.,  and 
increases  same  when  other  units  which  have  the  same 
target  are  rushing. 

5.  When  his  squad  is  ready  to  commence  firing,  sig- 
nals, '7  am  ready"  (by  raising  the  hand,  fingers  extended 
and  joined,  palm  toward  the  person  addressed.  See  'Tir- 
ing Commands  by  Arm  Signals.'') 

6.  Observes  constantly  (a)  The  effect  of  fire  and  (b) 
the  movements  of  the  enemy,  and  looks  to  the  rear  only 
when  signaled  by  the  whistle  of  the  platoon  leader. 

7.  Reports  to  platoon  commanders  when  ammunition  is 
running  short,  prevents  waste  of  same,  issues  and  redis- 
tributes ammunition.  Sees  that  his  men  obtain  ammuni- 
tion from  wounded  and  dead,  and  sees  that  the  men  keep 
30  rounds  in  the  right  pocket  section  of  the  belt  as  a  re- 
serve, to  be  expended  only  when  ordered  by  an  officer. 

8.  In  rushing,  sees  that  all  his  men  rush  simulta- 
neoiisly,  as  soon  as  possible  after  the  command,  ''Cease 
Firing,"  drop  to  the  ground  in  line,  and  in  such  a  location 
as  to  make  the  best  use  of  cover,  without  blanketing  the 
fire  of  or  endangering  other  units,  and  open  fire  imme- 
diately. (In  rushing,  the  Corporal  is  the  center  skirm- 
isher, and  in  halting  he  lies  down  immediately  in  rear  of 
his  squad.  The  Corporal  does  not  fire  with  his  squad 
except  to  steady  them  or  unless  ordered  to  do  so.) 


144  FIRE  DIRECTION  AND  CONTROL 

9.  Preserves  Hre  discipline,  steadies  his  men  and  pre- 
vents any  from  leaving  the  Hne  for  any  reason. 

10.  When  reenforcing,  takes  over  the  duties  of  dis- 
abled squad  leaders  of  adjacent  squads,  or  assists  them 
if  they  are  not  disabled. 

11.  When  leaving  his  position  for  any  reason,  notifies 
the  private  designated  to  take  his  place  and  informs  the 
entire  squad  of  such  action. 

12.  Must  knozv  all  signals,  and  the  semaphore  code. 

13.  Changes  his  position  behind  the  line  by  jrolling 
over  with  the  rifle  held  closely  against  his  body. 

Note.  Extended  order  results  in  fewer  casualties  and 
less  fire  effect. 

Specially  guard  flanks. 

Enfilade  and  ObHque  fire  are  effective  against  shielded 
artillery. 

170.  DUTIES  OF  THE  PRIVATE.  The  soldier  should 
learn  to 

1.  Obey  orders  exactly  and  promptly. 

2.  Recognise  targets  quickly. 

3.  Describe  targets  clearly  by  various  methods. 

4.  Promptly  set  sights,  upon  order. 

5.  Aim  carefully,  fire  deliberately  and  reload  rapidly. 

6.  Continually  observe  his  sector  or  target,  especially 
when  fire  is  suspended. 

7.  Make  good  use  of  natural,  artificial  and  accidental 
cover  as  trees,  ditches,  or  shell  holes  and  the  best  firing 
positions  as  standing,  kneeling,  sitting,  or  lying  down. 

8.  Obey  no  whistle  signals  except  signal  to  suspend 
firing. 

9.  Put  himself  under  command  of  nearest  squad  leader 


FIRE  DIRECTION  AND  CONTROL  145 

when  reenforcing  as  an  individual.     Also  obtain  target 
and  range  from  neighbor. 

10.  Cultivate  coolness  and  confidence  on  the  firing  line, 
and  aggressiveness  and  determination  in  charging. 

11.  In  rushing,  jump  up,  run  directly  to  the  front  at 
full  speed,  but  maintaining  the  line  without  hunching, 
drop,  and  crawl  up  to  the  nezv  line. 

12.  Remain  with  own  command,  but  if  separated  join 
adjacent  one. 

13.  Kee'p  silence  except  when  transmitting  information, 
or  charging. 

14.  Use  the  30  rounds  of  reserve  ammunition  kept  in 
the  right  pocket  section  of  the  belt  only  under  direct  or- 
ders. 

15.  Never  attend  the  wounded  in  action. 

16.  Charge  steadily  and  re-form  promptly. 

17.  Always  keep  face  to  the  enemy.  When  unable  to 
advance  dig  in,  and  wait  for  darkness. 

18.  Not  to  fire  until  he  understands  what  the  target 
is,  at  what  part  he  is  to  fire,  and  with  what  sight  setting. 

19.  Economize  ammunition. 

20.  Coolly  endure  enemy  iire. 

21.  Fire  quickly  though  steadily  without  undue  effort, 
and  at  the  ordered  rate. 

22.  Calmly  and  intelligently  use  the  rifle,  when  the 
commander  can  no  longer  exercise  control. 

Note.  Working  in  Pairs.  When  not  otherwise  di- 
rected, men  can  work  to  advantage  in  pairs,  indicating 
target  and  estimating  the  range  for  each  other  and  ob- 
serving the  results  of  each  other's  fire.  Suggested  rate 
of  fire,  3  shots  per  minute,  each.  This,  however,  de- 
pends on  so  many  conditions  that  it  can  only  be  worked 


146  FIRE  DIRECTION  AND  CONTROL 

out  by  the  soldier,  as  accuracy  must  not  be  lost  through 
speed. 
171.     FIRE  DISCIPLINE.     Important  General  Points. 

1.  In  collective  fire  no  man  will  fire  until  he  clearly 
recognizes  the  target  described  by  his  commander,  or  in 
individual  firing  without  selecting  a  definite  target. 

2.  As  a  rule  fire  should  be  delivered  deliberately,  and 
each  man  must  always  satisfy  himself  that  every  time  he 
squeezes  the  trigger  he  will  hit  the  target  aimed  at. 

3.  If  'Tire  at  will"  is  ordered,  every  man  will  fire  at 
his  own  best  rate  for  combining  rapidity  with  accuracy. 

4.  Each  man  will  take  care  to  pass  orders  carefully 
and  accurately. 

5.  Each  man  will  make  the  best  use  of  ground  and 
cover,  primarily  to  increase  fire  effect,  and  secondarily 
for  concealment  and  protection.  He  must  remember  that 
the  most  important  requirement,  when  firing  from  behind 
cover,  is  the  ability  of  a  man  to  use  his  rifle  to  the  best 
advantage,  and  that  his  eyes  must  be  kept  on  the  enemy 
between  shots  to  avoid  losing  sight  of  targets, 

6.  Each  man  must  watch  the  front  and  remain  alert 
and  attentive  zvhile  awaiting  orders.  He  must  open  fire 
smartly  when  ordered  to  do  so  on  such  fleeting  targets  as 
troops  in  movement,  and  continue  firing,  unless  otherwise 
ordered,  while  they  present  a  favorable  target. 

7.  He  must,  when  employing  individual  fire  on  the 
defensive,  especially  at  shorter  ranges,  mark  dozvn  troops 
by  noting  their  position  on  the  ground  or  behind  cover, 
and  open  fire  the  moment  they  expose  themselves  or  rise 
up  to  advance. 

8.  When  not  under  direct  control  of  a  fire  commander 
men  should  try  to  zvork  in  pairs,  indicating  targets,  esti- 


FIRE  DIRECTION  AND  CONTROL  147 

mating  ranges  for  each  other  and  observing  the  results  of 
each  others  fire. 

9.  If  incapacitated  from  advancing  and  firing,  a  man 
should  always  place  ammunition  in  a  conspicuous  place, 
ready  to  be  picked  up  by  others,  and  all  men  should  al- 
ways be  on  the  lookout  to  renew  their  ammunition  supply 
in  this  way. 


CHAPTER  V 
NIGHT  FIRING 

In  Offense  it  is  never  used.  It  is  not  only  useless  but 
absolutely  criminal.  The  bayonet  is  the  weapon  that  de- 
cides the  issue. 

In  Defense,  when  a  night  attack  is  apprehended,  prepa- 
ration should  be  made  to  sweep  with  fire  the  ground  im- 
mediately in  front,  over  which  the  assailant  must  ad- 
vance. Wait  until  the  enemy  is  within  30  yards,  then 
every  rifle  should  b^  fired  once  followed  immediately 
by  a  bayonet  charge. 

The  methods  employed  in  order  of  their  importance 
are: 

172.  (a)  INSTINCTIVE  ALIGNMENT  OF  RIFLES. 
Train  the  soldier  in  pointing  his  rifle  at  a  mark  near  the 
ground  within  100  yards  with  the  eyes  closed.  The  right 
eye  is  then  opened  and  error  noted.  Thus  a  soldier 
learns  his  error  and  how  to  correct  it. 

A  white  rag  wrapped  about  the  muzzle  of  the  rifle 
will  often  assist  in  aiming. 

173.  (b)   FIXED  RIFLE  RESTS  prepared  in  advance. 

174.  (c)  BY  PREPARED  ILLUMINATING  AIMING 
MARKS  giving  a  horizontal  line  of  sight. 

175.  (d)  BY  FIRING  AT  THE  FLASHES  of  the  ene- 
my's rifles. 

148 


CHAPTER  VI 
TACTICAL  USE  OF  RIFLE  FIRE 

176.  THE  IMMEDIATE  OBJECT  of  Rifle  Fire  is  to 
weaken  the  enemy  against  assault,  and  to  keep  down  the 
enemy's  fire.  Except  in  Enfilading  fire,  assault  is  al- 
most always  necessary  in  taking  a  position. 

177.  SUPERIORITY  OF  FIRE  is  established  by  su- 
periority of 

(a)  Fire  direction  and  control. 

(b)  Fire  discipline. 

(c)  Use  of  Rifle  (Rapidity  and  accuracy). 

(d)  Ammunition  supply. 

178.  OPENING  FIRE.  Decision  as  to  when  to  open 
fire  is  governed  by  the  following  considerations: 

In  Attack 

(a)  Principle  of  Surprise. 

(b)  Effect  of  fire  at  various  ranges. 

In  attacking  economize  fire  for  close  range  final  strug- 
gle. 

In  Defense  open  fire  sooner  than  in  attack  unless, 

(a)  To  GET  decisive  result. 

(b)  To  surprise  enemy. 


149 


CHAPTER  VII 
THE  USE  OF  COVER 

179.  GENERAL  REMARKS.  The  recruit  should  be 
given  careful  instruction  in  the  individual  use  of  cover. 

It  should  be  impressed  upon  him  that,  in  taking  advan- 
tage of  natural  cover,  he  must  be  able  to  fire  easily  and 
effectively  upon  the  enemy;  if  advancing  on  an  enemy, 
he  must  do  so  steadily  and  as  rapidly  as  possible ;  he 
must  conceal  himself  as  much  as  possible  while  firing  and 
while  advancing.  While  setting  his  sight,  he  should  he 
under  cover  or  lying  prone. 

180.  FIRING  FROM  COVER.  To  teach  him  to  fire 
easily  and  efifectively,  at  the  same  time  concealing  himself 
from  the  view  of  the  enemy,  he  is  practised  in  simulated 
firing  in  the  prone,  sitting,  and  kneeling  positions,  from 
behind  trees,  heaps  of  earth  or  rocks,  from  depressions, 
gullies,  ditches,  doorways,  or  windows.  He  is  taught  to 
Hre  around  the  right  side  of  his  concealment  whenever 
possible,  or,  when  this  is  not  possible,  to  rise  enough  to 
fire  over  the  top  of  his  concealment. 

181.  SELECTING  COVER.  When  the  details  are  un- 
derstood, he  is  required  to  select  cover  with  reference  to 
an  assumed  enemy  and  to  place  himself  behind  it  in 
proper  position  for  firing. 

182.  CHANGING  COVER.     The  evil  in  remaining  too 

150 


THE  USE  OF  COVER  151 

long  in  one  place,  however  good  the  concealment,  should 
be  explained.  He  should  be  taught  to  advance  from 
cover  to  cover,  selecting  cover  in  advance  before  leaving 
his  concealment. 

It  should  be  impressed  upon  him  that  a  man  running 
rapidly  toward  an  enemy  furnishes  a  poor  target.  He 
should  he  trained  in  springing  from  a  prone  position  he- 
hind  concealment,  running  at  top  speed  to  cover  and 
throwing  himself  he  hind  it.  He  should  also  be  practised 
in  advancing  from  cover  to  cover  by  crawling,  or  by  ly- 
ing on  the  left  side,  rifle  grasped  in  the  left  hand,  and 
pushing  himself  forward  with  the  right  leg,  or  by  rolling 
over  with  the  rifle  held  close  against  the  body. 

He  should  be  taught  that  when  fired  on  while  acting 
independently,  he  should  drop  to  the  ground,  seek  cover, 
and  then  endeavor  to  locate  his  enemy. 

The  instruction  of  the  recruit  in  the  use  of  cover  is 
continued  in  the  combat  exercises  of  the  company,  but 
he  must  then  be  taught  that  the  proper  advance  of  the 
platoon  or  company  and  the  eflfectiveness  of  its  fire  are  of 
greater  importance  than  the  question  of  cover  for  indi- 
viduals. He  should  also  be  taught  that  he  may  not  move 
about  or  shift  his  position  in  the  firing  line  except  the 
better  to  see  the  target. 

183.  GOOD  COVER.  Good  cover,  which,  however, 
will  very  rarely  be  found,  will  combine  the  following 
advantages : 

(a)   Affords  a  clear  view  up  to  the  enemy's  position. 

(\))   Permits  the  free  use  of  the  rifle. 

(c)  Provides  protection  for  him  from  the  enemy's 
fire. 

(d)  Gives  concealment  to  the  firer. 


152  THE  USE  OF  COVER 

Example,  a  low  solid  stone  wall  with  a  conven- 
ient OPENING. 

184.     POOR  COVER. 

(a)  Gives  a  restricted  view  of  the  enemy's  position. 

(b)  Restricts  the  free  use  of  the  rifle. 

(c)  Offers  a  well-defined  target  for  the  enemy's  fire 
and  provides  no  protection  from  its  effect. 

Example,  a  hedge  or  edge  of  a  wood. 


APPENDIX 

U.  S.  Magazine  Rifle,  1898 

U.  S.  Revolver.  Cal.  .45,  Model  1909 

New  Model  Clip-loading  Revolver. 

U.  S.  Revolver,  Cal.  .38 

Range  Precautions 


Fifl.  J12. 


154 


APPENDIX 

U.  S.  MAGAZINE  RIFLE,  MODEL  1898 

(Sometimes  called  the  Kraag.) 

185.  NOMENCLATUIIE.  This  rifle  is  composed  of 
87  parts,  the  most  important  of  which  are  shown  in 
Figs.  36  and  37. 

186.  THE  ASSEMBLED  PARTS  AND  THEIR  OPERA- 
TIONS. Most  of  the  operating  parts  may  be  inchided 
under  the  Bolt  Mechanism  and  the  Magazine  Mechanism. 

The  Bolt  Mechanism  consists  of  the  bolt,  sleeve,  ex- 
tractor, extractor  rivet,  safety  lock,  firing  pin,  striker, 
and  main  spring. 

The  Bolt  moves  backward  and  forward  and  rotates  in 
the  well  hole  of  the  receiver ;  it  carries  a  cartridge,  either 
from  the  magazine  or  one  placed  by  hand  in  front  of  it, 
into  the  chamber  and  supports  its  head  when  fired.  The 
locking  lug  will  sustain  any  powder  pressure  liable  to 
occur,  but  if  worn  by  usage  or  upset  by  excessive  pres- 
sures the  rear  end  of  the  guide  rib  will  bear  on  the  lock- 
ing shoulder  of  the  receiver,  permitting  the  continued 
use  of  the  arm  with  safety. 

The  Sleeve  unites  the  parts  of  the  bolt  mechanism; 
its  rotation  with  the  bolt  is  prevented  by  its  arm  occupy- 
ing the  opening  between  the  walls  of  the  receiver. 

155 


156  U.  S.  MAGAZINE   RIFLE,  MODEL  1898 

The  hook  of  the  Extractor  engages  the  rim  of  the 
cartridge  case  and  retains  the  head  of  the  latter  in  the 
countersink  of  the  bolt  until  the  case  is  ejected.  The 
extractor  spring,  engaging  its  lip  on  the  receiver,  pre- 
vents the  hook  from  releasing  the  rim  of  the  cartridge 
case,  v^hen  the  latter  is  being  started  from  the  chamber. 
The  extractor  pin  holds  the  bolt  open  for  convenience  in 
loading  when  using  single-loader  fire. 

The  Safety  Lock,  when  turned  to  the  left,  is  inopera- 
tive; when  turned  to  the  right,  the  point  of  its  spindle 
enters  the  notch  in  the  bolt  collar  and  locks  the  bolt.  If 
turned  to  the  right  when  the  piece  is  cocked,  its  cam 
forces  the  firing  pin  slightly  to  the  rear,  out  of  contact 
with  the  sear,  so  that,  if  the  trigger  be  pulled,  the  sear, 
when  the  trigger  is  released,  can  rise  to  catch  the  firing 
pin,  thereby  preventing  accidental  discharge.  If  turned 
to  the  right,  when  the  piece  is  not  cocked,  it  locks  the 
firing  pin  as  well  as  the  bolt. 

The  gun  having  been  discharged,  to  remove  the  empty 
cartridge  case,  reload  and  fire,  the  bolt  mechanism  oper- 
ates as  follows : 

To  Open  the  Bolt,  raise  the  handle  until  it  comes  into 
contact  with  the  sleeve,  then  pull  it  directly  to  the  rear 
until  the  locking  lug  strikes  the  locking  shoulder  of  the 
receiver. 

Raising  the  handle  rotates  the  bolt.  This  separates  the 
locking  lug  from  the  shoulder  of  its  recess  in  the  receiver, 
with  which  it  is  brought  into  close  contact  by  the  powder 
pressure.  This  separation  is  made  easy  by  the  slight 
inclination  to  the  axis  of  the  receiver  of  the  vertical 
planes  containing  the  rear  surface  of  the  locking  lug  and 
the  shoulder  of  its  recess. 


U.  S.  MAGAZINE  RIFLE,  MODEL  1898  157 

The  rotation  also  causes  the  cocking  cam  of  the  bolt 
to  force  the  firing  pin  to  the  rear,  withdrawing  the  point 
of  the  striker  into  the  bolt.  The  rotation  of  the  firing 
pin  is  prevented  by  the  lug  on  the  cocking  piece,  pro- 
jecting through  the  slot  in  the  sleeve  into  its  groove  in 
the  receiver.  As  the  sleeve  remains  longitudinally  sta- 
tionary with  reference  to  the  bolt,  this  rearward  motion  . 
of  the  firing  pin,  and  consequently  of  the  striker,  will 
begin  the  compression  of  the  main  spring,  since  the  rear 
end  of  the  latter  bears  against  the  front  end  of  the  barrel 
of  the  sleeve,  and  the  front  end  against  the  rear  end  of 
the  striker. 

When  the  bolt  handle  strikes  the  sleeve,  rotation  ceases, 
during  which  the  firing  pin  has  been  forced  to  the  rear 
by  the  cocking  cam  on  the  bolt  until  the  sear  notch  of 
the  cocking  piece  has  passed  the  point  of  the  sear,  the 
cocking  piece  nose  entered  the  notch  in  the  rear  end  of 
the  bolt  and  the  main  spring  partly  compressed;  the 
locking  lug  will  then  be  out  of  its  recess,  and  the  guide 
rib  under  the  extractor. 

When  the  bolt  handle  is  raised  into  contact  with  the 
cam  on  the  cocking  shoulder  of  the  receiver,  a  direct  mo- 
tion to  the  rear  will  be  combined  with  the  rotation,  so 
that  the  cartridge  case  will  be  started  from  the  chamber 
by  the  action  of  this  cam. 

The  bolt  is  then  drawn  directly  to  the  rear,  the  ex- 
tractor and  guide  rib  move  along  the  left  wall  and 
through  the  opening  between  the  two  walls  of  the  re- 
ceiver. The  parts  are  retained  in  position  by  the  cock- 
ing-piece  nose  remaining  in  the  notch  in  the  rear  end  of 
the  bolt,  and  the  main  spring  is  partly  compressed. 

To  Close  the  Bolt,  push  the  handle   forward  until  it 


158  U.  S.  MAGAZINE   RIFLE,  MODEL  1898 

strikes  the  cocking  shoulder,  then  turn  it  down  until  it 
conies  into  contact  with  its  seat  in  the  receiver.  As  the 
handle  is  turned  down,  the  rear  end  of  the  guide  rib 
traveling  along  the  cam  of  the  locking  shoulder  of  the 
receiver,  will  move  the  bolt  forward  until  the  locking 
lug  comes  into  contact  with  the  cam  of  its  recess  in  the 
receiver,  which  moves  the  bolt  slightly  forward  into  its 
closed  position.  As  all  movement  of  the  firing  pin  is 
prevented  by  the  point  of  the  sear  engaging  the  sear 
notch  of  the  cocking  piece,  the  forward  movement  of 
the  bolt,  produced  by  these  cams,  completes  the  com- 
pression of  the  main  spring,  seats  the  cartridge  in  the 
chamber,  and  forces  the  extractor  hook  over  the  rim  of 
the  cartridge  case. 

In  closing  the  bolt,  a  cartridge  from  the  magazine,  if 
using  magazine  fire,  or  one  placed  by  hand  in  the  well 
of  the  receiver  in  front  of  the  bolt,  will  be  carried  for- 
ward into  the  chamber.  The  Gun  is  then  ready  to  be 
fired. 

The  position  then  occupied  by  the  parts  is  shown  in 
Fig.  36. 

When  the  bolt  is  rotated  so  the  guide  rib  is  under  the 
extractor,  the  front  end  of  the  guide  rib  engages  a  lug 
on  the  underside  of  the  extractor  and  holds  the  latter 
against  the  left  wall  of  the  receiver  so  the  hook,  as  the 
bolt  is  closed,  wilt  enter  its  notch  in  the  receiver  and 
barrel. 

To  Pull  the  Trigger,  the  finger-piece  must  be  drawn 
to  the  rear  until  contact  with  the  receiver  is  transferred 
from  its  bearings  to  the  heel,  which  gives  a  creep  to  the 
trigger,  and  then  until  the  point  of  the  sear  is  with- 
drawn from  in  front  of  the  cocking  piece. 


U.   S.   MAGAZINE   RIFLE,   MODEL   1898  159 

The  heel  of  the  ejector  rises  into  its  groove  in  the  bolt, 
but  just  before  the  bolt  is  drawn  fully  to  the  rear,  the 
end  of  the  groove  suddenly  forces  the  heel  down,  caus- 
ing the  point  to  rise  in  front  of  the  bolt  and  strike  the 
cartridge  case.  As  the  bolt  is  closed,  the  heel  rises  again 
into  its  groove,  the  curved  portion  of  which  permits  the 
bolt  to  rotate  without  operating  the  ejector.  The  upper 
surface  of  the  front  end  of  the  ejector  is  shaped  so  as 
to  throw  the  cartridge  case  out  of  the  receiver,  upward 
and  to  the  right. 

It  is  to  be  noted  that,  in  this  system  of  bolt  mechanism, 
the  compression  of  the  main  spring,  the  seating  of  the 
cartridge  in  and  the  starting  of  the  empty  case  from  the 
chamber,  are  entirely  done  by  the  action  of  cams. 

The  Piece  may  be  Cocked  either  by  raising  the  bolt 
handle  until  it  strikes  the  sleeve  and  then  immediately 
turning  it  down,  or  by  pulling  the  cocking  piece  directly 
to  the  rear. 

In  Firing,  unless  the  bolt  handle  is  turned  fully  down 
against  its  seat  in  the  receiver,  the  cam  on  the  cocking 
piece  will  strike  that  in  the  rear  end  of  the  bolt  and  the 
energy  of  the  main  spring  will  be  expended  in  closing 
the  bolt  instead  of  on  the  primer ;  this  prevents  the  pos- 
sibility of  a  cartridge  being  fired  until  the  bolt  is  fully 
closed. 

The  opening  and  the  closing  of  the  bolt  should  each 
be  done  by  one  continuous  motion. 

The  Magazine  Mechanism  includes  the  gate,  carrier, 
follower,  magazine  spring,  hinge  bar  and  cut-off. 

Fig.  37  represents  a  cross  section  of  the  Model  1896 
gun,  through  the  point  of  the  ejector;  the  bolt  is  closed, 
the  magazine  contains  five  cartridges  and  is  ''off/' 


i6o  U.   S.  MAGAZINE  RIFLE,  MODEL  1898 

To  Charge  the  Magazine,  open  the  gate,  insert  the 
cartridges  from  a  clip,  or  from  the  hand,  then  close 
the  gate. 

As  the  gate  is  opened,  its  lug,  acting  on  the  cam  of  the 
carrier,  retracts  the  latter  within  the  recess  of  the  gate, 
leaving  an  unobstructed  opening  for  the  insertion  of  the 
cartridges.  As  the  gate  is  closed,  the  magazine  spring, 
the  front  end  of  which  bears  on  the  lug  of  the  arbor  of 
the  carrier,  swings  the  carrier  into  the  magazine,  against 
the  last  cartridge  inserted.  The  point  of  the  carrier 
forces  the  cartridges,  in  succession,  against  and  up  the 
curved  surface  of  the  side  plate,  into  the  magazine  chan- 
nel. When  there  is  only  one  cartridge  in  the  magazine, 
the  point  of  the  carrier  forces  it  up  on  the  top  of  the 
follower,  which  holds  it  high  enough  in  the  channel  to  be 
caught  by  the  bolt.  The  point  of  the  carrier  then  rests 
against  the  inner  surface  of  the  side  plate. 

When  the  thumb-piece  of  the  cut-off  in  the  Model  1896 
is  turned  up  (Fig.  37),  the  magazine  is  ''off."  The  point 
of  the  spindle  then  bears  on  the  rim  of  the  upper  cart- 
ridge and  holds  it  down  in  the  magazine  channel  below 
the  action  of  the  bolt.  The  magazine  mechanism  then 
remains  inoperative,  and  the  arm  can  be  used  as  a  sin- 
gle loader,  the  cartridges  in  the  magazine  being  held  in 
reserve. 

When  the  thumb-piece  of  the  cut-off,  in  the  Model 
1896,  is  turned  down,  the  magazine  is  ''on/'  The  point 
of  the  spindle  then  occupies  its  hole  in  the  upper  wall  of 
the  magazine  channel,  and  permits  the  top  cartridge  to 
rise  high  enough  to  be  caught  by  the  bolt  in  its  forward 
movement.  As  the  bolt  is  closed,  this  cartridge  is  pushed 
forward,  through  the  magazine  channel  and  well  of  the 


U.  S.  MAGAZINE  RIFLE,  MODEL   1898 


161 


receiver,  into  the  chamber,  the  point  of  the  bullet  being 
directed  by  the  ramps  on  the  side  plate  and  receiver. 
During  this  passage  the  cartridge  is  held  up  in  the  maga- 
zine chamber  by  the  pressure  of  those  below.     The  last 


Cut-Off. 

JRecelver, 

Side  plate. 
Magazines' — 


ExlradOT, 

\ 


MoA/rv  Spring. 
''  Fvrvag  JPinRod, 
yBoll. 
'Guide  rih. 


ilagazifie  Spring^ 


Fig.   37. — United   States  Magazine   Rifle,   Model    1896. 
Cross   Section  through    Magazine. 

one  in  the  magazine  is  held  up  first,  by  the  top  of  the 
follower,  and  after  passing  the  latter,  by  the  rib  of  the 
side  plate  and  left  edge  of  the  roof  of  the  magazine. 

In  the  Model  1898,  when  the  thumb-piece  of  the  cut-oflf 
is  turned  down,  the  magazine  is  ''off"  and  when  turned 
up  is  ''on" ;  or  the  reverse  of  what  it  is  in  the  Model 
1896.     As  the  arm  is  habitually  used  with  the  magazine 


i62  U.   S.   MAGAZINE   RIFLE,   MODEL   1898 

''off/'  the  thumb-piece  of  the  cut-off  is  better  protected 
when  turned  down. 

The  magazine  can  be  charged  with  the  bolt  closed  or 
open,  with  the  cut-off  turned  for  magazine  or  single- 
loader  fire,  and  if  one  or  more  cartridges  have  been  fired, 
can  be  filled. 

The  magazine  spring  actuates  the  carrier,  holds  the 
gate  open,  assists  in  closing  it,  and  holds  it  closed. 

The  guide  lip  prevents  the  heads  of  the  cartridges 
from  falling  into  the  well  of  the  gate  when  charging  the 
magazine. 

To  Open  the  Butt-plate  Cap,  insert  the  rim  of  an  empty 
cartridge  in  the  notch  in  the  cap  and  draw  it  open.  The 
joints  of  the  cleaning  rod  should  be  removed  from  the 
oiler.  In  replacing  the  oiler  and  rods,  insert  the  former 
so  its  bottom  will  be  next  the  butt  plate,  and,  with  one 
joint  of  the  rod,  push  the  oiler  into  its  seat,  then  insert 
the  rods. 

187.  DISMOUNTING  AND  ASSEMBLING  BY  SOL- 
DIER. The  bolt  and  magazine  mechanism  can  be  dis- 
mounted without  removing  the  stock.  The  latter  should 
never  be  done  except  for  making  repairs,  and  then  only 
by  some  selected  and  instructed  man. 

To  Dismount  Bolt  Mechanism. 

1.  Draw  the  bolt  fully  to  the  rear,  then  place  the  piece 
across  hollow  of  left  arm. 

2.  Lift  the  front  end  of  hook  of  extractor  off  bolt  with 
left  thumb,  and  at  the  same  time  turn  bolt  handle  to  left 
with  right  hand.  The  bolt  can  then  be  drawn  from  the 
receiver. 

3.  Take  bolt  handle  in  left  hand,  back  of  hand  down, 
bolt  upside  down.    Grasp  cocking  piece  with  right  hand. 


U.  S.  MAGAZINE   RIFLE,  MODEL   1898  163 

4.  Slightly  draw  back  cocking  piece  and  turn  it  to- 
ward the  operator  until  the  firing  pin  can  be  removed 
from  the  bolt. 

5.  Take  firing  pin  in  left  hand  and  bear  down  on  point 
of  striker  with  right  thumb  until  it  leaves  the  firing 
pin,  remove  main  spring  from  firing  pin,  and  the  latter 
from  sleeve. 

To  Assemble  Bolt  Mechanism. 

1.  Observe  that  the  safety  lock  is  turned  to  the  left. 
Reverse  the  order  of  the  steps  of  fifth  operation  in  dis- 
m.ounting. 

2.  Grasp  the  bolt  handle  in  left  hand  as  in  third  opera- 
tion in  dismounting,  and  the  firing  pin  in  right  hand, 
extractor  uppermost.     Insert  firing  pin  in  bolt. 

3.  Grasp  handle  of  bolt  with  fingers  of  both  hands, 
bolt  directed  downwards,  and  with  both  thumbs  on  the 
rear  of  safety  lock,  push  strongly  forward  and  turn  to 
right  with  thumbs  until  the  arm  of  the  sleeve  engages  the 
collar  of  the  bolt. 

4.  Grasp  bolt  and  cocking  piece  as  in  third  operation 
for  dismounting.  Draw  back  and  turn  cocking  piece 
from  the  operator  until  its  nose  enters  the  notch  on  the 
rear  end  of  the  bolt. 

5.  Take  bolt  in  right  hand  and  introduce  it  into  the 
receiver,  keeping  the  extractor  lifted  with  the  right 
thumb.  Turn  bolt  to  right  hand,  at  the  same  time  press 
strongly  with  first  finger  against  right  side  of  extractor. 

To  Dismount  Magazine  Mechanism. 

I.  The  gate  being  closed,  engage  the  flanged  head 
of  a  cartridge  case  under  the  lug  on  the  front  end  of  the 
hinge  bar  head  and  turn  the  latter  toward  the  gate,  out 
of  its  seat;  then  bear  heavily  on  the  gate  with  the  palm 


i64  U.  S.  MAGAZINE  RIFLE,  MODEL  1898 

of  the  right  hand,  to  overcome  the  pressure  of  the  maga- 
zine spring,  and,  with  the  left,  press  forward  against 
the  lug,  drawing  the  hinge  bar  pin  from  the  receiver. 

2.  Remove  the  gate,  magazine  spring,  carrier  and  fol- 
lower. 

To  Assemble  Magazine  Mechanism. 

1.  Hold  the  piece  with  the  right  side  uppermost.  In- 
sert arbor  of  carrier  into  its  hole  in  receiver  and  place 
end  of  left  thumb  across  magazine  to  prevent  carrier 
swinging  into  the  latter. 

2.  Place  magazine  spring  in  its  channel,  convex  side 
up,  rounded  end  to  the  rear,  particularly  observing  that 
the  lip  at  its  front  end  rests  in  the  notch  on  heel  of 
carrier. 

3.  Place  gate  in  its  seat,  lug  entering  between  carrier 
and  magazine  spring.  Remove  left  thumb  and  at  the 
same  time  press  gate  against  magazine  spring  with  right 
hand. 

4.  Insert  hinge  bar  pin  in  front  hinge  hole  in  receiver 
with  left  hand,  and  press  gate  down  strongly  until  pin 
can  be  pushed  through  gate  into  rear  hinge  hole. 

5.  After  the  hinge  bar  pin  is  fully  home,  turn  the  head 
into  its  seat  by  opening  the  gate.    . 

188.  PRECAUTIONS.  If  it  is  desired  to  carry  the 
piece  cocked,  with  a  cartridge  in  the  chamber,  the  bolt 
mechanism  should  be  secured  by  turning  the  safety  lock 
to  the  right. 

To  obtain  positive  ejection,  and  to  insure  the  bolt 
catching  the  top  cartridge  in  the  magazine,  when  using 
magazine  fire,  the  bolt  must  be  drawn  fully  to  the  rear 
in  opening  it. 

If  a  cartridge  is  pushed  from  the  magazine  partly  into 


U.  S.  MAGAZINE  RIFLE,  MODEL   1898  165 

the  chamber,  and  then  the  bolt  fully  drawn  to  the  rear, 
that  cartridge  will  remain  in  the  well  and  chamber,  and 
a  second  will  rise  from  the  magazine  in  front  of  the 
bolt.  If  the  bolt  is  again  pushed  forward,  the  second 
cartridge  will  strike  the  first  and  produce  a  jam.  To 
avoid  this,  always  close  the  bolt  on  a  cartridge  in  front  of 
it  to  insure  the  action  of  the  extractor  and  ejector  on 
that  cartridge,  when  the  bolt  is  opened. 

If  a  Jam  occurs,  draw  the  bolt  fully  to  the  rear,  with 
the  right  hand,  remove  the  first  cartridge  and  close  the 
bolt ;  if  the  first  cartridge  has  been  pushed  into  the  cham- 
ber, draw  the  bolt  to  the  rear,  with  the  thumb  of  the 
right  hand  push  the  second  cartridge  back  into  the  maga- 
zine and  cut  it  off ;  then  close  the  bolt  on  the  first  cart- 
ridge. 

Unless  the  bolt  handle  is  fully  turned  down  into  con- 
tact with  its  seat  in  the  receiver,  when  the  trigger  is 
pulled  the  nose  of  the  cocking  piece  will  strike  against 
the  cocking  cam  of  the  bolt,  and  the  energy  of  the  main 
spring  will  be  expended  in  closing  the  bolt  instead  of 
igniting  the  primer,  causing  a  misfire.  Care  should 
be  taken  not  to  raise  the  bolt  handle  with  the  forefinger 
if  the  trigger  is  pulled,  with  the  middle  one. 

It  is  essential  for  the  proper  working  and  preservation 
of  all  cams  that  they  be  kept  lubricated. 

U.  S.  REVOLVER,  CALIBER  45 

189.  NOMENCLATURE.  Colt's  double  action  re- 
volver, Caliber  .45,  Model  1909.  Parts,  Fig.  38  shows  a 
longitudinal  section  with  parts  of  the  mechanism  exposed 
to  view,  with  designations  as  follows:     (i)  butt  swivel, 


z66 


U.  S.  REVOLVER,  CALIBER  .45  167 

(2)  butt-swivel  pin,  (3)  crane,  (4)  crane  bushing,  (5) 
crane  lock,  (6)  crane-lock  screw,  (7)  cylinder  bolt,  (8) 
cylinder-bolt  spring,  (9)  cylinder-bolt  screw,-  (10)  hand, 
(11)  rebound  lever,  (12)  rebounding-lever  pin,  (13) 
ejector-rod  head,  (14)  ejector  rod,  (15)  ejector  spring, 
(16)  ejector  and  ratchet,  (17)  side  plate,  (18)  side- 
plate  screws,  (19)  latch,  (20)  latch  pin,  (21)  latch 
spring,  (22)  cylinder,  (23)  hammer  strut,  (24)  hammer- 
strut  pin,  (25)  hammer-strut  spring,  (26)  hammer,  fir- 
ing-pin, and  firing-pin  rivet,  {2y)  hammer  pin,  (28) 
hammer  stirrup,  (29)  hammer-stirrup  pin,  (30)  safety, 
(31)  safety  lever,  (32)  trigger,  (33)  trigger  pin,  (34) 
mainsprmg,  (35)  stock,  right,  (36)  escutcheon,  threaded, 
(37)  escutcheon,  plain,  (38)  stock,  left,  (39)  stock  pin, 
(40)  stock  screw,  (41)  barrel,  (42)  frame,  (43)  front 
sight,  (44)  recoil  plate. 

190.  CARE.  The  revolver  should  be  kept  clean,  free 
from  rust,  and  properly  oiled.  The  oil  should  not  be  used 
in  excess.  Waste  oil  left  in  the  mechanism  will  cause  the 
parts  to  gum  and  work  stiffly.  (See  also  Part  I,  Chap- 
ter V,  Care  of  the  Rifle  and  Pistol.) 

191.  IMPORTANT  POINTS.  The  lock  mechanism 
must  not  be  tampered  wath.  The  side  plate  should  not  be 
removed  except  under  the  supervision  of  a  non-commis- 
sioned officer. 

Never  attempt  to  remove  the  side  plate  by  prying  it 
out  of  place.  It  should  be  jarred  out  of  place  by  smart 
blows  struck  with  a  piece  of  wood  on  the  left  side  of 
the  frame  where  it  is  covered  by  the  stock. 

The  side  plate  must  be  replaced  from  the  rear  so  as 
to  put  the  latch  pin  stud  in  the  proper  position,  care  be- 
ing, taken  that  the  latch  is  drawn  back,  the  latch  pin  for- 


i68  U.  S.  REVOLVER,  CALIBER  .45 

ward  and  its  pin  upright,  so  that  it  may  enter  the  hole 
in  latch  without  forcing.  See  that  the  latch  spring  is 
in  its  proper  position  in  rear  of  latch. 

The  crane  and  cylinder  must  not  be  dismounted  un- 
less suitable  tools  are  available,  and  not  then  unless  ab- 
solutely necessary. 

Never  attempt  to  open  the  cylinder  when  the  hammer 
is  cocked. 

Never  attempt  to  cock  the  hammer  until  the  cylinder  is 
fully  closed  and  locked  in  the  frame. 

192.  OPEEATION".  To  eject  the  shells  and  load, 
push  the  latch  to  the  rear  and  spring  the  cylinder  to  the 
left  out  of  the  frame ;  pressure  against  the  front  end  of 
the  ejector  rod  head  will  empty  the  chambers  and  the 
cylinder  is  ready  to  be  reloaded ;  moving  the  cylinder  into 
the  frame,  taking  care  that  it  is  revolved  so  that  the 
cylinder  bolt  will  enter  one  of  the  rectangular  cuts  in 
its  surface. 

193.  TO  DISMOUNT  AND  ASSEMBLE  REVOLVER 
To  dismount  the  revolver,  remove  the  parts  in  the  follow- 
ing order:  Crane-lock  screw  (6)  and  crane-lock  (5); 
crane  (3)  with  cylinder  (22)  ;  stock  screw  (40)  ;  (35 
and  ^S)  ;  side-plate  screws  (13)  ;  side  plate  (17)  ;  main- 
spring (34)  ;  rebound-lever  pin  (12)  ;  rebound  lever 
(11)  ;  hand  (10)  and  trigger  (32)  ;  hammer  (26)  ;  cylin- 
der-bolt screw  (9)  ;  cylinder  bolt  (7)  ;  cylinder  bolt 
spring  (8)  ;  latch  pin  (20)  ;  safety  lever  (31)  ;  and  safety 

(30). 

The  crane  and  cylinder  should  not  be  further  dis- 
mounted or  the  recoil  plate  removed  except  at  ordnance 
depots.  The  crane  and  cylinder  are  dismounted  as  fol- 
lows:  (a)  unscrew  ejector  (16)  from  ejector  rod  (14), 


U.  S.  REVOLVER,  CALIBER  .45  169 

right-handed  thread;  (b)  remove  cylinder  (22)  from 
crane  arbor;  (c)  unscrew  ejector-rod  head  (13)  from 
ejector  rod  (14)  ;  (d)  unscrew  crane  bushing  (4),  right- 
handed  thread;  (c)  remove  ejectod-rod  (14)  and  spring 

(15). 

To  assemble,  reverse  the  above  order. 

In  removing  or  replacing  a  hand  in  a  revolver,  lift 
rebound  lever  by  inserting  screw-driver  between  it  and 
the  frame,  so  as  to  free  it  from  lug  on  hand,  and  it  is 
important  that  it  be  so  adjusted  that  the  upward  move- 
ment of  the  hand  will  not  begin  to  revolve  the  cylinder 
before  the  trigger  withdraws  the  cylinder  bolt.  To  in- 
sure this  it  may  be  necessary  to  file  the  hand  slightly  at 
the  end  which  first  engages  the  ratchet,  and,  as  this  may 
bring  the  two  points  of  the  hand  which  engage  the  teeth 
of  the  ratchet  too  near  together,  the  lower  projection 
must  be  adjusted  so  as  to  bring  the  cylinder  in  proper 
position  for  firing.  This  can  be  done  only  by  expert 
workmen  at  a  factory. 

194.  HOW  TO  COCK  THE  REVOLVER.  The  revolver 
should  be  cocked  by  putting  the  thumb  on  the  hammer  at 
as  nearly  a  right  angle  to  the  hammer  as  possible,  and  by 
the  action  of  the  thumb  muscles  alone  bringing  the  ham- 
mer back  to  the  position  of  aim  or  raise  pistol.  Where 
the  soldier's  hand  is  small  this  cannot  be  done,  and  in 
this  case  it  assists  the  operation  to  give  the  revolver  a 
slight  tilt  to  the  right  and  upward  (to  the  left).  Par- 
ticular care  should  be  taken  that  the  forefinger  is  clear  of 
the  trigger  or  the  cylinder  will  not  revolve.  Jerking  the 
revolver  forward  while  holding  the  thumb  on  the  hammer 
will  not  be  permitted. 

195.  SELF-COCKING  ACTION.     The   force   required 


170  U.  S.  REVOLVER,  CALIBER  .45 

to  squeeze  the  trigger  when  the  self-cocking  device  is 
used  is  considerably  greater  than  with  the  single  action. 
To  accustom  a  soldier  to  the  use  of  the  self-cocking  mech- 
anism and  also  to  strengthen  and  develop  the  muscles 
of  the  hand,  a  few  minutes'  practice  daily  in  holding  the 
unloaded  revolver  on  a  mark  and  snapping  it,  using  the 
self-cocking  mechanism  is  recommended.  The  use  of 
the  self-cocking  device  in  firing  is  not  recommended 
except  in  emergency.  By  practice  in  cocking  the  re- 
volver the  soldier  can  become  sufficiently  expert  to  fire 
very  rapidly,  using  single  action,  while  his  accuracy  will 
be  greater  than  when  using  the  double  action. 

196.  POUBLE  ACTION.  In  using  double  action  the 
trigger  should  not  be  pulled  through  with  one  motion, 
but  merely  sufficiently  to  cock  the  revolver,  which  should 
then  be  accurately  aimed  and  the  final  squeeze  imparted 
through  the  trigger  to  release  the  sear.  A  certain  amount 
of  practice  is  necessary  to  secure  the  necessary  control 
of  the  trigger,  but  with  practice  it  is  quite  practicable  to 
cock  the  revolver  and  lower  the  hammer,  using  double 
action,  and  thus  revolve  the  cylinder  without  firing  the 
revolver  at  all. 

-197.  MANUAL  OF  THE  REVOLVER.  The  instruc- 
tion under  this  head  is  first  given  on  foot. 

When  a  lanyard  is  used,  one  end  is  attached  to  the  butt 
of  the  revolver,  the  other  forms  a  sliding  loop,  which  is 
passed  over  the  head  and  drawn  snug  against  the  right 
arm-pit.  The  lanyard  should  then  be  of  just  such 
length  that  the  arm  can  be  extended  without  constraint 

Raise  PistoL  The  revolver  being  in  the  holster,  to 
raise  pistol:  i.  Raise,  2.  Pistol,  grasp  the  stock,  back 
of  the  hand  to  the  body. 


U.  S.  REVOLVER,  CALIBER  .45  171 

At  the  command,  Pistol,  draw  the  revolver  from  the 
holster,  reverse  it,  muzzle  up,  the  hand  holding  the  stock 
with  the  thumb  and  the  three  first  fingers;  the  little 
finger  m.ay  be  placed  under  the  butt;  forefinger  outside 
the  guard ;  guard  to  the  front ;  barrel  nearly  vertical ; 
hand  as  high  as  the  neck  and  six  inches  to  the  right  and 
front  of  the  right  shoulder.  This  is  the  position  of 
Raise  Pistol. 

When  dismounted,  carry  the  right  foot  about  twenty 
inches  to  the  right  and  place  the  left  hand  in  the  position 
of  the  bridle  hand. 

Lower  Pistol.  Being  mounted  and  at  the  position  of 
Raise  Pistol,  i.  Lower,  2.  Pistol. 

At  the  command,  Pistol,  lower  the  revolver  without 
changing  the  grasp,  and  rest  the  hand  and  revolver  on 
the  right  thigh,  back  of  hand  up,  muzzle  in  front  of 
right  knee. 

When  dismounted,  lower  the  revolver  without  chang- 
ing the  grasp  of  the  hand,  arm  by  the  side  and  nearly 
extended,  back  of  the  hand  to  the  right;  barrel  incHned 
to  the  front  and  downward. 

Return  Pistol.  Being  at  raise  or  lower  pistol:  i.  Re- 
turn, 2.  Pistol. 

At  the  command,  Pistol,  insert  the  revolver  in  the 
holster,  back  of  hand  to  body,  button  the  flap  and  drop 
the  hand  by  the  side. 

If  dismounted,  bring  the  right  foot  by  the  side  of  the 
left  and  drop  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

If  the  holster  is  so  constructed  that  the  butt  is  to  the 
rear,  Raise  and  Return  Pistol  are  executed  as  above,  ex- 
cept that  the  back  of  the  hand  is  to  the  right  and  the 
revolver  is  not  reversed. 


272  U.  S.  REVOLVER,  CALIBER  .45 

To  Inspect  Pistol,     i.  Inspection,  2.  PistoL 

At  the  command,  Pistol,  execute  Raise  Pistol,  except 
that  the  revolver  is  held  about  six  inches  in  front  of  the 
center  of  the  body,  barrel  up,  pointing  to  the  left  front 
and  upward  at  an  angle  of  about  45  degrees,  wrist 
straight,  and  as  high  as  the  breast. 

The  instructor  passes  along  the  ranks,  and  examines 
the  revolvers.  To  inspect  the  revolver  minutely,  he  takes 
it  in  his  hands,  and  then  returns  it  to  the  trooper,  who 
grasps  it  at  the  stock  and  resumes  Inspection  Pistol;  each 
trooper  returns  pistol  as  the  inspector  passes  to  the  next. 
If  the  revolvers  are  not  inspected,  they  are  returned  by 
the  command,  i.  Return,  2.  Pistol. 

When  dismounted  the  left  hand  and  right  foot  remain 
in  place. 

To  Load  includes  to  Unload : — ^being  at  Raise  or  Lower 
Pistol,  place  the  revolver  at  the  cylinder  in  the  left  hand, 
latch  up,  barrel  inclined  to  the  left  front  and  downward 
at  an  angle  of  about  30  degrees;  draw  back  the  latch 
with  the  right  thumb,  push  the  cylinder  out  with  the 
second  finger  of  the  left  hand,  arid  if  necessary,  eject 
the  empty  shells  by  pressing  the  ejector  with  the  left 
thumb,  right  hand  steadying  the  revolver  at  the  stock; 
take  a  cartridge  from  the  belt  or  box,  insert  it  in  the 
cbamber,  press  it  home  with  the  right  thumb  and  so  on 
for  each  chamber  to  be  loaded;  close  the  cylinder  with 
the  left  thumb,  and  Raise  Pistol. 

198.  FIRINGS.  For  single  action,  being  at  Raise  of 
Lower  Pistol:  i.  To  the  front  (or  right  oblique,  etc.),  or 
I.  At  (such  an  object),  2.  Squad,  3.  Ready. 

At  the  command.  Ready,  cock  the  revolver  with  the 


U.  S.  REVOLVER,  CALIBER  .45  173 

right  thumb  and  direct  the  eyes  to  the  front  or  toward  the 
objective. 

I.  Squad,  2.  Fire. 

At  the  command,  Fire,  thrust  and  point  the  revolver 
toward  the  objective,  arm  nearly  or  quite  extended,  keep- 
ing the  eyes  oil  the  object,  and  fire ;  resume  the  Raise  or 
Lower  Pistol  according  to  the  position  before  firing. 

To  continue  the  firing  in  the  same  direction,  or  at  the 
same  objective:     i.  Squad,  2.  Ready,  3.  Squad,  4.  Fire. 

For  double  action.  Being  at  Raise  or  Lower  Pistol,  i. 
To  the  front  (right  oblique,  etc.),  2.  Squad,  3.  Fire,  or  i. 
At  (such  an  object),  2.  Squad,  3.  Fire.  Executed  as  in 
Single  Action,  except  that  at  the  command,  Fire,  the 
revolver  is  cocked  by  pressing  steadily  on  the  trigger. 

An  almost  imperceptible  pause  may  be  allowed  between 
the  thrusting  and  firing  in  which  to  correctly  point  the 
revolver.  Deliberate  aiming,  however,  should  not  be  en- 
couraged. After  firing  without  cartridges  pause  an  in- 
stant and  see  if  the  revolver  is  correctly  pointed,  to  get 
the  personal  error. 

The  instructor  must  take  into  account  individual  pecu- 
liarities in  order  to  secure  the  best  results  in  firing;  in 
such  cases  departure  from  the  text  is  permissible. 

In  a  similar  manner,  the  men  will  be  instructed  to  fire 
to  the  left,  right,  right  oblique,  right  rear,  and  rear. 
When  firing  to  the  left  the  revolver  hand  will  be  about 
opposite  the  left  shoulder;  when  firing  to  the  rear  or 
right  rear,  the  shoulders  are  turned  about  45  degrees  to 
the  left. 

Instruction  may  be  given  with  the  revolver  in  the  left 
hand. 


174  U.  S.  REVOLVER,  CALIBER  .45 

The  recruits  are  first  taught  the  motions  of  loading  and 
firing  without  using  cartridges.  Loading  and  pointing 
practice  shall  be  given  mounted,  at  all  gaits. 

No  cartridges  will  be  used,  except  when  indicated  in 
the  first  command,  thus:  i.  (So  many)  dummy  (blank 
or  ball)  cartridges,  2.  Load. 

To  Fire  at  Will.  i.  Fire  at  will,  2.  To  the  front,  etc.,  or 
2.  At  (such  an  object),  3.  Commence  Firing,  4.  Cease  Fir- 
ing. 

The  trooper  fires  as  rapidly  as  is  consistent  with  care- 
ful pointing  at  each  shot.  The  Raise  or  Lozver  Pistol  is 
resumed  after  each  shot. 

At  the  command,  Cease  Firing,  the  firing  will  stop, 
and  the  men  resume  the  Raise  or  Lozver  Pistol. 

The  practice  will  be  conducted  on  the  principles  ex- 
plained in  the  Small  Arms  Firing  Regulations. 

199.  MUSCLE  EXERCISES.  See  Part  II,  Chapter 
IV  (Muscle  Exercises). 

200.  POSITION  INSTRUCTION.  (See  Part  II, 
Chapter  V.) 

201.  NEW  MODEL  CLIP-LOADING  DOU- 
BLE-ACTION REVOLVER  CHAMBERED 
FOR  AUTOMATIC   PISTOL  AMMUNITION 

Note.  The  preceding  data  and  manual  apply  also  to 
this  revolver,  except  the  m.ethod  of  loading.     This  arm 


Fig.   39. — Loading  Clip   for   Automatic  Revolver   Ammunition. 


U.  S.  CLIP-LOADING  REVOLVER  175 

IS  loaded  by  clips  which  hold  three  cartridges,  each  of 
the  cartridges  being  held  by  the  groove  near  the  head 
and  thus  prevented  from  dropping  through  the  chamber. 

(Fig.  39.) 

Loading.  This  new  type  of  weapon  may  be  loaded  as 
follows:  Place  the  revolver  at  the  cylinder  in  the 
fingers  of  the  left  hand,  latch  up,  barrel  inclined  to  the 
left  front  and  downward  at  an  angle  of  about  30  degrees ; 
draw  back  the  latch  with  the  right  thumb,  push  the 
cylinder  out  with  the  second  finger  of  the  left  hand,  and 
if  necessary,  eject  empty  shells  by  pressing  the  ejector 
rod  with  the  left  thumb,  right  hand  steadying  the  revolver 
at  the  stock ;  take  a  clip  between  the  thumb  and  finger  of 
the  right  hand,  the  thumb  resting  against  the  cartridges, 
and  insert  the  cartridges  into  the  three  adjoining  cham- 
bers of  the  cylinder  which  are  on  the  right  (the  revolver 
being  in  the  Position  of.  Load)y  steadying  the  cylinder 
with  the  left  thumb ;  then  rotate  the  cylinder  a  half  turn 
with  the  left  thumb  and  load  the  three  remaining  cham- 
bers with  a  second  clip  in  the  same  manner;  swing  the 
cylinder  into  the  frame,  taking  care  that  it  is  revolved  so 
that  the  cylinder  bolt  will  enter  one  of  the  rectangular 
cuts  in  its  surface. 

Note.  When  official  instructions  for  loading  with  the 
clip  have  been  added  to  the  revolver  manual,  the  above 
tentative  method  will  be  superseded. 


202.     U.  S.  REVOLVER,  CALIBER  .38 

The  preceding  data  on  U.  S.  Revolver,  caliber  .45,  ap- 
ply to  U.  S.  R.  .38,  except  as  regards  certain  diflferences 


Jn'T^    O   W.*   Vh    Ul    ^1   v<   •-  o    ^ 


r        C  >  o 


^*  o  -T^'  oj  M  oj  fo  -^  lAvd  t>.od  a\  d  M  oj  CO  'j-  >^^  i^oo  o\  o 


176 


RANGE  PRECAUTIONS  I77 

in    the    internal    mechanism    which    only    concern    the 
armorer.     (Fig.  40.) 


203.     RANGE  PRECAUTIONS 

Perfect  discipline  must  be  maintained  on  all  ranges. 

Post  a  copy  of  the  following  precautions  in  a  prominent 
position  in  a  gallery  range  back  of  the  firing  line: 

No  person  should  be  allowed  on  the  firing  fine  except 
the  officer,  the  instructors,  and  the  men  actually  firing. 
Others  rr.ust  be  kept  well  back  of  the  firing  line. 

When  any  one  passes  over  the  firing  line  to  examine 
the  targels,  or  otherwise,  all  zveapons  should  he  unloaded, 
and  in  pllery  practice  should  be  laid  dozvn. 

Never  load  unless  the  range  is  open  for  firing.  This 
is  usually  indicated  by  taking  down  the  red  range  flags. 
This  doe;  not  refer  to  the  red  flags  displayed  to  warn 
outsiders  that  the  range  is  in  use. 

Never  load  or  have  cartridges  in  the  magazine  except 
on  the  Unng  line. 

When  irst  picking  up  a  riHe  or  pistol  see  that  it  is  not 
loaded. 

With  tie  rifle,  pull  back  the  bolt  smartly,  see  that  there 
is  no  cartridge  in  the  breach  (if  necessary,  insert  the 
little  finger),  also  see  that  the  magazine  is  empty. 

With  tie  pistol  take  out  the  magazine,  draw  back  the 
slide  and  ^ee  that  there  is  no  cartridge  in  the  breach  or 
in  the  marazine.     Insert  the  magazine. 

r\  If 


Keep  ri 
Keep  tl 


e  bolt  open  when  not  firing, 
slide  open  when  not  firing   (and  the  pistol 


not  in  thdholster).     Never  **snap"  except  on  the  firing 


178  RANGE  PRECAUTIONS 

line  and  then  only  in  the  direction  of  the  butts  when 
they  are  open  for  use. 

When  loaded,  the  rifle  should  have  the  safety  lock 
turned  to  Safe, 

When  loaded,  the  pistol  should  be  carried  with  the 
safety  lock  pushed  up  at  Safe, 

When  loaded  the  revolver,  if  caliber  .38,  being  loaded 
with  only  five  cartridges,  should  be  carried  with  the  ham- 
mer down  on  an  empty  chamber. 

Under  no  circumstances  should  the  firing  pin  be  let 
down  by  hand  on  a  cartridge.  But  lowering  the  ham- 
mer of  the  automatic  pistol  by  hand  does  not  bring  the 
firing  pin  in  contact  with  the  cartridge,  and  so,  in  an  emer- 
gency, the  pistol  may  be  carried  with  the  hammer  down 
and  a  cartridge  in  the  breach. 

In  case  of  a  misfire  with  the  rifle,  it  is  unsafe  to  raise 
the  bolt  handle  immediately,  as  it  may  be  a  case  of  hang- 
fire.  In  such  cases  wait  a  few  seconds,  when  the  bolt 
may  be  opened  in  perfect  safety. 


INDEX 

Numbers  indicate  Sections  not  Pages 

SECTION 

Adjusting  sights 78,79 

Aiming,  bull  .  , 100 

device,  Belgian 56 

device,  Hollifield ...  56 

down  . 60 

exercise,  pistol 132 

exercise,  rifle 66 

off  for  enemy 60 

off  for  wind 60 

rod  device 56 

Allowance,  ammunition 90 

for  windage 60 

Allowance,  exercise 60 

Ammunition ,  allowance 90 

rifle  1903 9 

rifle  1917 30 

pistol 103 

Assemble,  bolt  mechanism,  rifle  1903 18 

bolt  mechanism,  rifle  1917 39 

magazine  mechanism,  rifle  1903 20 

magazinemechanism,  rifle  1917 41 

pistol 106 

revolver 193 

Automatic  pistol 102-141 

Auxiliary  aiming  point 164 

Battle  sight 7,28,54 

rifle  1903 7 

rifle  1917 28 

Belgian  aiming  device 56 

Blacking  sights 77 

Bolt,  to  remove,  rifle  1903 16 

to  remove,  rifle  1917 36 

Bolt  mechanism  rifle,  193 4.10 

mechanism  rifle.  1917 25,31 

mechanism,  to  assemble,  rifle  1903 18 

mechanism,  to  assemble,  rifle  1917 39 

mechanism,  to  dismount,  rifle  1903 17 

mechanism,  to  dismount,  rifle  1917 38 

Canting 59 

Care  of ,  pistol 43-49 

rifle 43-49 

rifle,  important  points 49 

revolver 190 

179 


i8o  INDEX 

^<                .  ^        ,          .          .  SECTION 

Classes  of  fire,  by  direction 146 

by  rate 145 

by  results 147 

Cleaning,  pistol 48 

revolver 190 

^    rifle      . 43-49 

Combat  practice 96 

Combined  sights        . 144,167 

Combined  system  describing  targets 163 

Commands,  arm  signals 152 

^    firing 151 

Common  unit  of  measure 158 

Corporal,  duties  of 169 

Cover 179-184 

position  and  aiming  drill 72 

Cut-off 14 

Definitions,  military  vocabulary 142 

terraine  vocabulary         143 

Deflection  and  elevation  drills 73-79 

Designation  and  recognition  of  targets 159-165 

Dismount,  bolt,  rifle  1903 17 

bolt,  rifle  1917 38 

magazine,  rifle  1903 19 

magazine,  rifle  1917 40 

pistol 106 

revolver 193 

Drills,  deflection  and  elevation 73-79 

position  and  aiming,  pistol 135 

position  and  aiming,  rifle 61-72 

position  and  aiming,  from  cover 72 

position  and  aiming,  kneeling 69 

position  and  aiming,  prone 71 

position  and  aiming,  sitting 70 

Duties  of ,  corporal 169 

fire  commander 167 

fire  unit  commander 169 

platoon  guides 168 

platoon  leader 167 

private 170 

Effect  of  wind 79 

Elevation 73 

rule  for 75 

Estimating  distance 153-158 

Exercise,  adjusting  sights 79 

aiming  rifle 66 

allowance  for  windage 60 

battle  sight 60 

canting 59 

loading  magazine  from  belt 62 

muscle,  pistol 125-128 

muscle,  rifle 65 

rapid  fire 68 

with  sighting  bar 57 


INDEX  i8i 

SECTION 

Exercise,  triangle  of  sighting 58 

trigger  squeeze 67 

Feature  of  ground  system 159 

Finger  system      . 162 

Fire,  classes  of  by  direction 146 

classes  of  by  rate 145 

classes  of  by  results 147 

commander 167 

control 166-171 

direction  and  control 166-171 

discipline 171 

opening 178 

superiority  of 177 

unit  commander ■ 169 

Firing,  at  night 172-175 

commands,  (verbal) 148-151 

commands,  arm  signals 152 

from  cover 180 

vocabulary     .   , 144 

First  sighting  exercise 57 

Follower  depressor 61 

Fourth  sighting  exercise 59 

Gallery  practice 98-101 

General  military  vocabulary 142 

Hints  to  Instructors (Page)  xxiii 

Hollifield  aiming  device 56 

Horizontal  clock  face  system 160 

Important  points,  automatic  pistol 108 

cleaning 49 

fire  direction  and  control 166 

fire  discipline 171 

sighting  exercises 55 

Instruction  practice,  description  of  targets 165 

rifle • 92 

Instructors,  hints  to (Page)  xxiii 

Jams 15,35 

Kinds  of  fire 145-147 

Kneeling 69 

Known  distance  practice 90 

Kraag  rifle 185-188 

Line  of  sight 51 

Load   .      , 61 

maga-zine,  rifle  1903. 12 

magazine,  rifle  19ir\ 33 

from  belt 62 

pistol 117 

simulate '    .      .      ,      .  61 


i82  INDEX 

Loading  and  firing  commands 148-152 

arm  signals *  152 

verbal 151 

Magazine,  load,  rifle  1903 .  12 

rifle  1917 S3 

mechanism,  rifle  1903 11 

rifle  1917 32 

Manual,  pistol  (new) 109-124 

revolver  (Cal.  .45) 197 

Marking  ranges 157 

Mid  range  practice ]  94 

Mil  system,  describing  targets         162 

estimating  distance 158 

Military  vocabulary 142 

Muscle  exercises,  rifle 65 

pistol 125-128 

Night  firing 172-175 

Nomenclature,  pistol  (auto.  1911) 102 

revolver  (Cal.  .45) 189 

rifle,  1903 1-8 

rifle,  1917 22-29 

Normal  sight 53 

Official  tests         80-97 

Opening  fire 178 

Operation,  pistol  (auto.  1911) 105-108 

revolver 192 

rifle,  1903 10-21 

rifle,  1917 31-42 

Parts,  pistol  (auto.  1911) 102 

revolver 189 

rifle,  1903 1-8 

rifle,  1917 22-29 

Peep  sight 7-28 

Pistol 102-141 

care  of 141 

cleaning 48 

position  and  aiming  drills 135 

position  instruction 129-135 

Platoon,  guide 168 

leader 167 

Point  of  aim 52 

Position  and  aiming  drills,  rifle 61-72 

pistol -   .      .  135 

Position,  exercise,  rifle 64 

instruction,  pistol 129-135 

Precautions,  range 203 

special       . (Page)  xxii 

Private,  duties  of 170 

Prone,  position  and  aiming  drill 71 

Quick  fire,  pistol ,  137 


INDEX  183 

SECTION 

Range,  cards 156 

practice,  pistol 136-141 

practice,  rifle 90 

precautions 203 

Rapid  fire 145 

exercise 68 

gallery  practice 101 

procedure 92 

rifle 92,93 

Rate,  classes  of  fire  by 145 

Record  practice .  93 

Remove  bolt  (1903) 16 

Remove  bolt  (1917) 36 

Revolvrer(Cal.  38) 202 

Revolver  (Cal.  .45) 89-200 

clip  loading 201 

care 190 

Rifle  (1898) 185-188 

(1903) ,  operation 10-21 

parts 1-8 

(1917),  operation 31-42 

parts 22-29 

ammunition 9,  30 

care,  cleaning 43-49 

sights  (1903) 7 

sights  (1917)         28 

slmg 21 

to  load  (1903) 12 

to  load  (1917) 33 

to  unload  (1903) 13 

to  unload  (1917) 34 

Rule,  for  elevation 75 

for  windage 76 

Safety  devices,  pistol 107 

Second  sighting  exercise 58 

Sight,  adjusting 78 

battle 7,28,54 

normal 53 

system 162 

Sights,  (1903)       . 7 

(1917) 28 

Sighting,  apparatus 56 

bar 56, 57 

exercises 50-60 

Simulate  load 61 

Sitting,  position  and  aiming  drill 70 

Sling 21 

Slow  fire 145 

gallery  practice 100 

pistol ' ,  136 

rifle      . 92-94 

Special  precautions (Page)  xxii 

Springfield  rifle  (1903) 1-21 


i84  INDEX 


SECTION 

Standing,  position  exercise 64 

Superiority  of  fire 177 

Tactical  use  of  rifie  fire 176-178 

Target  machine 56 

Targets 97 

description  and  recognition  of , 159-165 

Telescopic  sights 95 

Terraine  vocabulary 143 

Third  sighting  exercise 58 

Trajectory 50 

Triangle  of  sighting  .      .    _ .  58 

Trigger  squeeze  exercise,  pistol 131,135 

rifle 67 

U.  S.  revolver  (Cal.  .38) ,      ,  202 

(Cal.  .45) .  189-200 

clip  loading .  201 

U.  S.  rifle  (1898) ■      .  185-188 

(1903) 1-21 

(1917) 22-42 

Units  of  measure 158 

Unload  (rifle)    , 63 

magazine,  rifle  (1903) 13 

magazine,  rifle  (1917) 34 

pistol 118 

Use  of,  cover 179-184 

sling 21 

Vertical  clock  face  system 161 

Vocabulary,  firing 144 

general  military 142 

terraine 143 

Wind,  aiming  off  for 60 

effect  of 79 

Windage 74 

allowance 60 

rule  for 76 

Working  in  pairs 170 

Zero  of  rifle »  78 


NOTES 


NOTES 


NOTES 


NOTES 


NOTES 


NOTES 


NOTES 


NOTES 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 

LOAN  DEPT. 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below, 
Of  on  the  date  to  which  renewed.  Renewals  only: 

Tel.  No.  642-3405 
Renewals  may  be  made  4  days  priod  to  date  due. 
Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 


iUN    6 1972  f^ 


flEC'QLQ   MAY  ^S/e-dPlVl  9  1 


iic^-l 


od 


LD21A-60m-8.'70  ,.   . General  Library 


369538 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CAUFORNIA  UBRARY 


